Division 26 - Electrical

SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. and Supplementary

1.2
SUMMARY
   A.   Section Includes:
       1.   Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
2.   Sleeves for raceways and cables.
3.   Sleeve seals.
4.   Grout.
5.   Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3
DEFINITIONS
   A.   EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
   B.   NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4
SUBMITTALS
   A.   Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.5
COORDINATION
   A.   Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1.   To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.
2.   To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.
3.   To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4.   So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Set sleeves, conduits, boxes, etc. accurately before any concrete is poured or partitions are erected or he may set boxes on the forms so as to leave openings in the floors or walls, in which case he shall be called upon to fill in the concrete voids around the sleeves, etc. shall be filled in by Contractor. Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for provisions of all structural elements. Sleeves shall be provided by Electrical Contractor for all perimeter unit connections. Should the Electrical Contractor neglect to perform the above said preliminary work and should cutting be required in order to install his conduit or equipment, then the expense of cutting and restoring of surfaces to their original condition shall be borne by the electrical contractor.

D. Cutting and Patching, comply with the requirements of Division 1 for the cutting and patching of other work to accommodate the installation of electrical work. Except as individually authorized by the University, cutting and patching of electrical work to accommodate the installation of other work is not permitted.

E. Prepare drawings indicating the exact size, location and material of all sleeves openings combined with all other trades. Sleeves with in 1’6” of a column face shall be A-36 steel sleeve. Drawings shall be submitted at least 3 weeks prior to fabrication of reinforcing steel. Drawings shall be submitted to Architect, Structural Engineer, Concrete Sub-contractor and General Contractor.

F. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

G. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a.   Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b.   Calpico, Inc.
c.   Metraflex Co.
d.   Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2.   Sealing Elements EPDM, NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
3.   Pressure Plates: Plastic, Carbon steel, Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4.   Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating, Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

END OF SECTION 260500

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1.   Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2.   Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
3.   Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.   Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.
2.   American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
3.   General Cable Corporation.
4.   Senator Wire & Cable Company.
5.   Southwire Company.
6.   Carol Cable Company Inc.

C. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

D. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN, XHHW, UF, USE, and, SO.

E. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC, mineral- insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI, Type SO and Type USE with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.   AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2.   Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
3.   O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
4.   3M; Electrical Products Division.
5.   Tyco Electronics Corp.
6.   AMP Incoporated.

C. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

2.4 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings and product name by one of the following:

1.   Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2.   Calpico, Inc.
3.   Metraflex Co.
4.   Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
5.   3M/ Electrical Products Division.

D. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1.   Sealing Elements: EPDM, NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
2.   Pressure Plates: Carbon steel, Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
3.   Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating, Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway, Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI, Type SE or USE multiconductor cable.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC, Metal-clad cable, Type MC, Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC, Metal-clad cable, Type MC. Mineral- insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN- THWN, single conductors in raceway Underground feeder cable, Type UF.

E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC, Metal-clad cable, Type MC and Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI.

F. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC, Metal-clad cable, Type MC, Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI.

G. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Type MC, Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI.

H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Metal-clad cable, Type MC Mineral-insulated, metal- sheathed cable, Type MI.

I. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Underground branch-circuit cable, Type UF.

J. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway Metal-clad cable, Type MC, Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI.

K. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Type MC, Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI.

L. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless- steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

M. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

N. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway Power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes, Power-limited tray cable, in cable tray.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Install wires and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer’s written instruction NECA’S.

B. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

H. Pull conductors: Use a UL-Listed and manufacturer approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary, compound used must not deteriorate conductors or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure valves.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1.   Test procedures used.
2.   Test results that comply with requirements.
3.   Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION 260519

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2
SUMMARY
   A.   This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment and basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other Sections of these Specifications.
   B.   Ground each separately-derived system neutral to Building grounding system as shown on Drawings.
   C.   Provide communications systems grounding conductor at point of service entrance and connect to grounding system.
   D.   Bond together system neutrals; service equipment enclosures; exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment; metal raceway systems; grounding conductor in raceways; receptacle ground connectors; and plumbing systems.

1.3
SUBMITTALS
   A.   Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
   B.   Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
       1.   Test wells.
2.   Ground rods, includes connectors and connection materials and ground fittings.
3.   Ground rings.
4.   Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
5.   Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.
6.   Grounding conductor.
   C.   Field test and observations certified by the independent testing company.
   D.   Field quality-control reports.
   E.   Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1.   Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells, ground rings, grounding connections for separately derived systems, based on NFPA 70B .

a. Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not.
b. Include recommended testing intervals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA70, National Electrical Code.

B. Comply with UL 467.

C. Comply with ANSI/EEE C2 – National Electrical Safety Code.

D. ANSI/IEEE 32 – Requirements, terms and test procedures for neutral grounding devices.

E. Comply with IEEE Standard 142 – Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.

F. Comply with ANSI C33.8.

G. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled:

1. The Terms Listed and Labeled: As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1.   Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2.   Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3.   Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
4.   Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
5.   Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.2 CONNECTORS PRODUCTS

A. Mechanical Connectors

1. The mechanical connector bodies shall be manufactured from high strength, height conductivity cast copper ally material. Bolts, nuts, washers and lockwashers shall be make of silicon bronze and supplied as part of the connector body and shall be of the two-bolt type.

2. Split bolt connector types are NOT allowed unless indicated on the drawings.

3. The connectors shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the catalog number, conductor size and manufacturer.

B. Compression Connectors.

1. The compression connectors shall be manufactured from pure wrought copper. The conductivity of this material shall be no less than 99 percent by IACS Standards.

2. The connectors shall meet or exceed the performance requirements of IEEE 837, latest revision.

3. The installation of the connectors shall be made with a compression, tool and die system as recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors.

4. The connectors shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer, catalog number, conductor size and the required compression tool settings.

5. Each connector shall be factory filled with an oxide-inhibiting compound.

C. Exothermic Connections: Provide exothermic-weld kit and selected per manufacturer’s written instructions for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad, Zinc-coated steel, sectional type; 3/4 inch by 10 feet and 5/8 by 96 inches in diameter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.

2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus.

E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1.   Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2.   Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated.
3.   Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4.   Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING OVERHEAD LINES

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Install two parallel ground rods if resistance to ground by a single, ground-rod electrode exceeds 25 ohms.

C. Drive ground rods until tops are 12 inches below finished grade in undisturbed earth.

D. Ground-Rod Connections: Install bolted connectors for underground connections and connections to rods.

   E.   Lightning Arrester Grounding Conductors: Separate from other grounding conductors.
   F.   Secondary Neutral and Transformer Enclosure:   Interconnect and connect to grounding conductor.
   G.   Protect grounding conductors running on surface of wood poles with molding extended from grade level up to and through communication service and transformer spaces.

3.3
GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
   A.   Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B.   Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned- copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches from the foundation.

3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1.   Feeders and branch circuits.
2.   Lighting circuits.
3.   Receptacle circuits.
4.   Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
5.   Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
6.   Flexible raceway runs.
7.   Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
8.   Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.
9.   Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units.
10.   X-Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in circuits supplying x-ray equipment.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct- mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

G. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J- STD-607-A.

1.   For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.
2.   Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch grounding bus.
3.   Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

H. Metal and Wood Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

3. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1.   Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.
2.   Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3.   Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1.   Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2.   Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3.   Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

G. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart.

H. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of building area.

1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps to building steel.
2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building's foundation.

I. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.

1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation.

2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.

3.6 LABELING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.

B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed.

1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager."

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1.   After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2.   Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.   Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and

their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

G. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1.   Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
2.   Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
3.   Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
4.   Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 < ohm(s).
5.   Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.
6.   Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

H. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION 260526

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals and associated fastenings for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

B. Provide hangers, clamps, anchors, inserts, supports, supplementary steel framing and hardware of the proper size and load capacity to support electrical equipment and raceways, whether indicated on the drawings or not.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

D. TC: Cable tray

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1.   Steel slotted support systems.
2.   Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
3.   Submit structural calculation for approval as required. Calculations include stress and deflection analysis. Submit design criteria and selection calculation.
4.   Supporting devices and fastening methods shall be subject to the review and approval of structural engineer.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1.   Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2.   Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
3.   Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
4.   Equipment supports.

C. Welding certificates.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Electrical component standard: components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

C. Electrical components shall be listed and labeled by UL, ETL, CSA or other approved, nationally recognized. Testing and listing agencies

D. Installation standard: Installation shall meet or exceed the national electrical contractors association (NECA- standard of installation.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems and U-Channel Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory- fabricated components for field assembly.

a.   American Electric Kindorf.
b.   Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
c.   ERICO International Corporation.
d.   GS Metals Corp.
e.   Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f.   Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

3.   Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
4.   Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.
5.   Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA- 4.
6.   Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1 surface.

a.   Allied Tube & Conduit.
b.   Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
c.   Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited.
d.   Seasafe, Inc.

3.   Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items.
4.   Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel.
5.   Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1)   Hilti Inc.
2)   ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3)   MKT Fastening, LLC.
4)   Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

1)   Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2)   Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3)   Hilti Inc.
4)   ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5)   MKT Fastening, LLC. 6)

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4.   Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.
5.   Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6.   Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7.   Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

B. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps single-bolt conduit clamps single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.

C. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT IMC RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1.   To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2.   To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3.   To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
4.   To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5.   Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
6.   To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. Spring-tension clamps To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
7.   Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1.   Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
2.   Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3.   Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections Section "High- Performance Coatings" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 260529

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2
SUMMARY
   A.   This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
       1.   Raceway includes the following:
       a.   EMT
b.   FMC
c.   LFMC
d.   LFNC
e.   RNC
f.   RGS
g.   WIREWAYS
h.   SURFACE RACEWAYS
       2.   Boxes, enclosures and cabinets include the following:
       a.   Device boxes
b.   Outlet boxes
c.   Pull and junction boxes
d.   Cabinets and hinged-cover enclosures
       3.   Miscellaneous: Products include the following:
       a.   Expansion/Deflection fittings
b.   Bushings
   B.   Related Sections include the following:
       1.   Division 26 Section “Hangers and Support for Electrical Systems”.
       2.   Division 26 Section “Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems”.

1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

F. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

G. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Custom enclosures and cabinets.
2. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following:

a.   Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.
b.   Frame and cover design.
c.   Grounding details.
d.   Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.
e.   Joint details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For wireways, nonmetallic wireways surface metallic raceways and floor box and poke-thru floor box with factory-applied texture and color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required for wireways, nonmetallic wireways surface metallic raceways, floor box and poke-thru floor box submit samples.

E. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1.   Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.
2.   HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.
3.   Layout and installation of raceways and boxes with construction elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance and access.
4.   Verify routing and termination locations of conduits and boxes prior to rough-in.

F. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

G. Source quality-control test reports.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.   AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2.   Alflex Inc.
3.   Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
4.   Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
5.   Electri-Flex Co.
6.   Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
7.   Maverick Tube Corporation.
8.   O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
9.   Wheatland Tube Company.
10.   Grinnell Co., Allied Tube and Conduit Division.

C. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 and UL6.

D. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

E. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated [rigid steel conduit] [IMC].

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.
2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

G. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

H. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

J. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1.   Conduit Fittings for Hazardous Classified Locations: Comply with UL 886.
2.   Fittings for EMT: Steel set-screw or compression type.
3.   Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

K. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.   AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2.   Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
3.   Arnco Corporation.
4.   CANTEX Inc.
5.   CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
6.   Condux International, Inc.
7.   ElecSYS, Inc.
8.   Electri-Flex Co.
9.   Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
10.   Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
11.   RACO; a Hubbell Company.
12.   Thomas & Betts Corporation.

C. ENT: NEMA TC 13.

D. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

E. LFNC: UL 1660.

F. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

G. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.

2.3 OPTICAL FIBER/COMMUNICATIONS CABLE RACEWAY AND FITTINGS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.   Arnco Corporation.
2.   Endot Industries Inc.
3.   IPEX Inc.
4.   Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

C. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible type, approved for [plenum] [riser] [general-use] installation.

2.4 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.   Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2.   Hoffman.
3.   Square D; Schneider Electric.

C. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, 12, 3R, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold- down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

E. Wireway Covers: Hinged type Screw-cover type Flanged-and-gasketed type As indicated.

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.5 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Hoffman.
2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

C. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with no holes or knockouts. Cover is gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with

captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections are flanged, with stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

D. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.

E. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold- down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

2.6 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect .

a.   Thomas & Betts Corporation.
b.   Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
c.   Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.
d.   Hubbell Incorporated.

B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard and custom colors.

a.   Butler Manufacturing Company; Walker Division.
b.   Enduro Systems, Inc.; Composite Products Division.
c.   Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division.
d.   Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
e.   Panduit Corp.
f.   Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
g.   Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

2.7 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.   Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2.   EGS/Appleton Electric.
3.   Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
4.   Hoffman.
5.   Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.
6.   O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
7.   RACO; a Hubbell Company.
8.   Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
9.   Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.
10.   Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
11.   Thomas & Betts Corporation.
12.   Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
13.   Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

F. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, fully adjustable semi-adjustable, rectangular.

G. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.

H. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

I. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.

K. Cabinets:

1.   NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2.   Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3.   Key latch to match panelboards.
4.   Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5.   Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.8 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.

1.   Color of Frame and Cover: Gray.
2.   Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open, integral closed bottom, unless otherwise indicated.
3.   Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure.
4.   Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
5.   Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." "TELEPHONE." as indicated for each service.
6.   Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
7.   Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.

1.   Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
3.   Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

a.   Armorcast Products Company.
b.   Carson Industries LLC.
c.   CDR Systems Corporation.
d.   NewBasis.
e.   Quazite.

C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester-resin enclosure joined to polymer-concrete top ring or frame.

a.   Armorcast Products Company.
b.   Carson Industries LLC.
c.   Christy Concrete Products.
d.   Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast.

e. Quazite.

D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers of polymer concrete,reinforced concrete cast iron hot-dip galvanized-steel diamond plate and fiberglass.

a.   Carson Industries LLC.
b.   Christy Concrete Products.
c.   Nordic Fiberglass, Inc.
d.   Quazite.

2.9 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

2.10 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1.   Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2.   Calpico, Inc.
3.   Metraflex Co.
4.   Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

D. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1.   Sealing Elements: EPDM NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
2.   Pressure Plates: Plastic Carbon steel Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
3.   Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1.   Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency.
2.   Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.
3.   Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1.   Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit IMC RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC RNC, Type EPC- 80-PVC.
2.   Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit IMC EMT RNC, Type EPC-40- PVC
3.   Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.
4.   Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC and LFNC.
5.   Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R and 4.
6.   Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring:

a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete Fiberglass enclosures with polymer-concrete frame and cover Fiberglass- reinforced polyester resin, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.
b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer-concrete units Heavy- duty fiberglass units with polymer-concrete frame and cover, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.

c. Handholes and Pull Boxes Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf (13 345-N) vertical loading.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1.   Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT, ENT or RNC.
2.   Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT, RNC identified for such use.
3.   Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit and IMC. Includes raceways in the following locations:

a.   Loading dock.
b.   Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.
c.   Mechanical rooms.

4.   Electrical RoomConcealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT, ENT or RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.
5.   Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
6.   Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit and IMC.
7.   Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: Plenum-type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway and EMT .
8.   Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: Riser- type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway EMT.
9.   Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: General-use, optical fiber/communications cable raceway Riser- type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway Plenum-type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway EMT .
10.   Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel and nonmetallic in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1.   Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
2.   Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
3.   Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

L. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:

1.   3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet.
2.   1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.
3.   Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

M. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.
2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

N. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m).

1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:

a.   Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight:   125 deg F temperature change.
b.   Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.
c.   Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change.
d.   Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change.
3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.

O. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for [recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, ]equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

P. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

Q. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

R. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2.   Install backfill.
3.   After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction.
4.   Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.
5.   Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.
b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line and below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 260533

SECTION 260548.16 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.   Restraint channel bracings.
2.   Restraint cables.
3.   Seismic-restraint accessories.
4.   Mechanical anchor bolts.
5.   Adhesive anchor bolts.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.
b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each seismic-restraint device.

1. Include design calculations and details for selecting seismic restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading caused by equipment weight, operation, and seismic and wind forces required to select seismic and wind restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

3. Seismic and Wind Restraint Details:

a.   Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and wind restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
b.   Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.
c.   Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.
d.   Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service member of ICC-ES, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints. Electrical components include:

1.   Control panels.
2.   Generators.
3.   Luminaires.
4.   Motor control centers.
5.   Panelboards.
6.   Photovoltaic system components.
7.   Substations.
8.   Switchboards.
9.   Switchgear.
10.   Transformers.
11.   Unit substations.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis. They shall bear anchorage preapproval from OSHPD in addition to preapproval, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings, by ICC-ES or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) that support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1       PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
   A.   Wind-Restraint Loading:
       1.   Basic Wind Speed: 93 MPH.
2.   Building Classification Category: II.
3.   Minimum 16.1 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by maximum area of component projected on vertical plane normal to wind direction and 45 degrees either side of normal.
   B.   Seismic-Restraint Loading:
       1.   Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D.
2.   Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II.
       a.   Component Importance Factor: 1.0.
b.   Component Response Modification Factor: 3.5.
c.   Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.
       3.   Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods: (0.2 Second)
4.   Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: (0.072)

2.2
RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS
   A.   Manufactures:
1.   Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
2.   Korfund
3.   Mason Industries, Inc.
4.   Vibration Eliminator Company
5.   Vibration Isolation

6. Vibration Mountings & control
7. Novia; A division of C&P

B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end, with other matching components, and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

2.3 RESTRAINT CABLES

A.   Manufactures:
1.   Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
2.   Korfund
3.   Mason Industries, Inc.
4.   Vibration Eliminator Company
5.   Vibration Isolation
6.   Vibration Mountings & control
7.   Novia; A division of C&P

B. Restraint Cables: ASTM A603 galvanized steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

2.4 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.

C. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.

D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

E. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

F. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

2.5
MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS
   A.   Manufactures:
1.   Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
2.   Korfund
3.   Mason Industries, Inc.
4.   Vibration Eliminator Company
5.   Vibration Isolation
6.   Vibration Mountings & control
7.   Novia; A division of C&P
   B.   Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E488.

2.6
ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS
   A.   Manufactures:
1.   Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
2.   Korfund
3.   Mason Industries, Inc.
4.   Vibration Eliminator Company
5.   Vibration Isolation
6.   Vibration Mountings & control
7.   Novia; A division of C&P
   B.   Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as
tested according to ASTM E488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods caused by seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES providing required submittals for component.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

F. Drilled-in Anchors:

1.   Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2.   Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.
3.   Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

   4.   Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.
5.   Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque using a torque wrench.
6.   Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications.

3.4
ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where connection is terminated to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.

3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
   A.   Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
   B.   Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:
       1.   Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.   Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.
3.   Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.
4.   Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.
5.   Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
   C.   Seismic controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
   D.   Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

END OF SECTION 260548.16

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.   Identification for raceways.
2.   Identification of power and control cables.
3.   Identification for conductors.
4.   Underground-line warning tape.
5.   Warning labels and signs.
6.   Instruction signs.
7.   Equipment identification labels.
8.   Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch or 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.
2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch or 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch or 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.6 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1.   Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.
2.   Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
3.   Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1.   Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
2.   Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.
3.   Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes:   TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

C. Tag: Type I:

1.   Pigmented polyolefin, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
2.   Thickness: 4 mils.
3.   Weight: 18.5 lb/1000 sq. ft.
4.   3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 30 lbf, and 2500 psi.

D. Tag: Type II:

1.   Multilayer laminate consisting of high-density polyethylene scrim coated with pigmented polyolefin, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
2.   Thickness: 12 mils.
3.   Weight: 36.1 lb/1000 sq. ft.
4.   3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 400 lbf, and 11,500 psi.

E. Tag: Type ID:

1.   Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
2.   Overall Thickness: 5 mils.
3.   Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil.
4.   Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft.
5.   3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf, and 4600 psi.

F. Tag: Type IID:

1. Reinforced, detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented woven scrim, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the

continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
2.   Overall Thickness: 8 mils.
3.   Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil.
4.   Weight: 34 lb/1000 sq. ft.
5.   3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 300 lbf, and 12,500 psi.

2.7 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1.   Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.
2.   1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
3.   Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1.   Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396- inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.
2.   1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
3.   Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."

2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1.   Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2.   Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3.   Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch.

2.10 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1.   Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2.   Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
3.   Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
4.   Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1.   Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2.   Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
3.   Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
4.   Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

1.   Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2.   Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.
3.   UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.

4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F.
5. Color: Black.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.

J. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4- inch wide black stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:

1.   Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
2.   Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3.   Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

B. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl Snap-around labels. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals.

C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals.

D. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1.   Emergency Power.
2.   Power.
3.   UPS.

E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.
b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1)   Phase A: Black.
2)   Phase B: Red.
3)   Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown.

2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

F. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags, nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive-backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation].

G. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

H. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1.   Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2.   Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3.   Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

J. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.
2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

K. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

L. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive warning labels, Baked-enamel warning signs, Metal-backed, butyrate warning signs.

1.   Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
2.   Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3.   Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
4.   For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.

M. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

N. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer, load shedding.

O. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a.   Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label, Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay, Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
b.   Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, Stenciled legend 4 inches high.
c.   Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.
d.   Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a.   Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
b.   Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c.   Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
d.   Switchgear.
e.   Switchboards.
f.   Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
g.   Substations.
h.   Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
i.   Motor-control centers.
j.   Enclosed switches.
k.   Enclosed circuit breakers.
l.   Enclosed controllers.
m.   Variable-speed controllers.
n.   Push-button stations.
o.   Power transfer equipment.

p.   Contactors.
q.   Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
r.   Battery-inverter units.
s.   Battery racks.
t.   Power-generating units.
u.   Monitoring and control equipment.
v.   UPS equipment.

END OF SECTION 260553

SECTION 260573.13 - SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a computer-based, fault-current study to determine the minimum interrupting capacity of circuit protective devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. Existing to remain items shall remain functional throughout the construction period.

B. Field Adjusting Agency: An independent electrical testing agency with full-time employees and the capability to adjust devices and conduct testing indicated and that is a member company of NETA.

C. One-Line Diagram: A diagram that shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein.

D. Power System Analysis Software Developer: An entity that commercially develops, maintains, and distributes computer software used for power system studies.

E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located.

F. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion of the circuit from the system.

G. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

H. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served.

I. Single-Line Diagram: See "One-Line Diagram."

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:
1. Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals may be in digital form.

a. Short-circuit study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
b. Short-circuit study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

1) Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.
2) Revised one-line diagram, reflecting field investigation results and results of short-circuit study.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data:
1. For Power System Analysis Specialist.

B. Product Certificates: For short-circuit study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. For overcurrent protective devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
2. The following are from the Short-Circuit Study Report:

a.   Final one-line diagram.
b.   Final Short-Circuit Study Report.
c.   Short-circuit study data files.
d.   Power system data.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Study shall be performed using commercially developed and distributed software designed specifically for power system analysis.

B. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section.

C. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

1. Power System Analysis Software Qualifications: Computer program shall be designed to perform short-circuit studies or have a function, component, or add-on module designed to perform short-circuit studies.
2. Computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development Professional certification.

D. Power Systems Analysis Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.

E. Short-Circuit Study Certification: Short-Circuit Study Report shall be signed and sealed by Power Systems Analysis Specialist.

F. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications:

1.   Employer of a NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification responsible for all field adjusting of the Work.
2.   A member company of NETA.
3.   Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1       POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
   A.   Providers:
1.   EasyPower, LLC (Formerly ESA Inc.
2.   ETAP – Digital Twin Platform
3.   SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
   B.   Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 551.
       1.   Analytical features of power systems analysis software program shall have capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.
   C.   Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current- characteristic curves as part of its output.

2.2
SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENTS
   A.   Executive summary of study findings.
   B.   Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpretation of results.

C. One-line diagram of modeled power system, showing the following:

1.   Protective device designations and ampere ratings.
2.   Conductor types, sizes, and lengths.
3.   Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings.
4.   Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.
5.   Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations and ratings.
6.   Any revisions to electrical equipment required by the study.

D. Comments and recommendations for system improvements or revisions in a written document, separate from one-line diagram.

E. Protective Device Evaluation:

1.   Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to available short-circuit currents. Verify that equipment withstand ratings exceed available short-circuit current at equipment installation locations.
2.   Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus calculated short-circuit duties.
3.   For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
4.   For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication factors listed in standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
5.   Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

F. Short-Circuit Study Input Data:

1.   One-line diagram of system being studied.
2.   Power sources available.
3.   Manufacturer, model, and interrupting rating of protective devices.
4.   Conductors.
5.   Transformer data.

G. Short-Circuit Study Output Reports:

1. Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a.   Voltage.
b.   Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle.
c.   Fault-point X/R ratio.
d.   Equivalent impedance.

2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage.

b.   Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.
c.   Fault-point X/R ratio.
d.   Calculated asymmetrical fault currents:

1) Based on fault-point X/R ratio.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for conduct of the study.

1.   Verify completeness of data supplied on one-line diagram. Call any discrepancies to Architect's attention.
2.   For equipment included as Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.
3.   For relocated equipment and that which is existing to remain, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and engineers. Qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be as defined by NFPA 70E.

B. Gather and tabulate the required input data to support the short-circuit study. Comply with requirements in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for recording circuit protective device characteristics. Record data on a Record Document copy of one-line diagram. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 551 as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. Data include, but are not limited to, the following:

1.   Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.
2.   Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service.
3.   Power sources and ties.
4.   For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.
5.   For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and impedance.
6.   For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.
7.   Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.
8.   Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and conductor material.
9.   Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.

10. Conductor sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic).

3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.

B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.

C. Base study on device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.

D. Extent of electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.

E. Begin short-circuit current analysis at the service, extending down to system overcurrent protective devices as follows:

1. To distribution system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less.

F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

G. Include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and asynchronous generators and apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems. Also account for the fault-current dc decrement to address asymmetrical requirements of interrupting equipment.

H. Calculate short-circuit momentary duty for a three-phase bolted fault and a single line-to-ground fault at each equipment indicated on one-line diagram.

1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

I. Include in the report identification of any protective device applied outside its capacity.

END OF SECTION 260573.13

SECTION 260573.16 - COORDINATION STUDIES PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes computer-based, overcurrent protective device coordination studies to determine overcurrent protective devices and to determine overcurrent protective device settings for selective tripping.

1. Study results shall be used to determine coordination of series-rated devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. Existing to remain items shall remain functional throughout the construction period.

B. Field Adjusting Agency: An independent electrical testing agency with full-time employees and the capability to adjust devices and conduct testing indicated and that is a member company of NETA.

C. One-Line Diagram: A diagram that shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein.

D. Power System Analysis Software Developer: An entity that commercially develops, maintains, and distributes computer software used for power system studies.

E. Power System Analysis Specialist: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located.

F. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion of the circuit from the system.

G. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

H. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served.

I. Single-Line Diagram: See "One-Line Diagram."

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:
1. Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals may be in digital form.

a. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
b. Study and equipment evaluation reports.

2. Overcurrent protective device coordination study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data:
1. For Power Systems Analysis Specialist.

B. Product Certificates: For overcurrent protective device coordination study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For overcurrent protective devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. The following are from the Coordination Study Report:

a.   Final one-line diagram.
b.   Final protective device coordination study.
c.   Coordination study data files.
d.   List of all protective device settings.
e.   Time-current coordination curves.
f.   Power system data.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Studies shall be performed using commercially developed and distributed software designed specifically for power system analysis.

B. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section.

C. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

D. Power System Analysis Software Qualifications:

1. Computer program shall be designed to perform coordination studies or have a function, component, or add-on module designed to perform coordination studies.
2. Computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development Professional certification.

E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.

F. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications:

1.   Employer of a NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III responsible for all field adjusting of the Work.
2.   A member company of NETA.
3.   Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A.   Providers:
1.   EasyPower, LLC (Formerly ESA Inc.
2.   ETAP – Digital Twin Platform
3.   SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

B. Comply with IEEE 242 and IEEE 399.

C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

D. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current- characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

1. Optional Features:

a. Arcing faults.
b. Simultaneous faults.

c. Explicit negative sequence.
d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.

2.2 COORDINATION STUDY REPORT CONTENTS

A. Executive summary of study findings.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpretation of results.

C. One-line diagram of modeled power system, showing the following:

1.   Protective device designations and ampere ratings.
2.   Conductor types, sizes, and lengths.
3.   Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings.
4.   Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.
5.   Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.
6.   Any revisions to electrical equipment required by the study.
7.   Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.

a. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output Reports" Paragraph in "Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573.13 "Short-Circuit Studies."

D. Protective Device Coordination Study:

1. Report recommended settings of protective devices, ready to be applied in the field. Use manufacturer's data sheets for recording the recommended setting of overcurrent protective devices when available.

a. Phase and Ground Relays:

1)   Device tag.
2)   Relay current transformer ratio and tap, time dial, and instantaneous pickup value.
3)   Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable.

b. Circuit Breakers:

1)   Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, and ground).
2)   Adjustable time-current characteristic.
3)   Adjustable instantaneous pickup.
4)   Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.

c. Fuses: Show current rating, voltage, and class.

E. Time-Current Coordination Curves: Determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices.

Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:

1.   Device tag and title, one-line diagram with legend identifying the portion of the system covered.
2.   Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed.
3.   Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.
4.   Plot the following listed characteristic curves, as applicable:

a.   Power utility's overcurrent protective device.
b.   Low-voltage fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total clearing, tolerance, and damage bands.
c.   Low-voltage equipment circuit-breaker trip devices, including manufacturer's tolerance bands.
d.   Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI through-fault protection curves.
e.   Cables and conductors damage curves.
f.   Ground-fault protective devices.
g.   Motor-starting characteristics and motor damage points.
h.   Generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point.
i.   The largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor-control center and panelboard.

5.   Maintain selectivity for tripping currents caused by overloads.
6.   Maintain maximum achievable selectivity for tripping currents caused by overloads on series-rated devices.
7.   Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation is achieved.
8.   Comments and recommendations for system improvements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.

1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for conduct of the overcurrent protective device study.

1.   Verify completeness of data supplied in one-line diagram on Drawings. Call any discrepancies to Architect's attention.
2.   For equipment included as Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.
3.   For relocated equipment and that which is existing to remain, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and engineers. Qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be as defined by NFPA 70E.

B. Gather and tabulate all required input data to support the coordination study. List below is a guide. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 551 for the amount of detail required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. Data include, but are not limited to, the following:

1.   Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.
2.   Electrical power utility impedance at the service.
3.   Power sources and ties.
4.   Short-circuit current at each system bus (three phase and line to ground).
5.   Full-load current of all loads.
6.   Voltage level at each bus.
7.   For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.
8.   For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and impedance.
9.   For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.
10.   Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.
11.   For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.
12.   Maximum demands from service meters.
13.   Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, size, and conductor material.
14.   Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.
15.   Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material, and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic).
16.   Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system one-line diagram, cross- referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.
b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and overload capability.

c.   Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve.
d.   Generator thermal-damage curve.
e.   Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.
f.   Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility company.
g.   Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
h.   Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes root mean square (rms) symmetrical, ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short- time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
i.   Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.
j.   Switchgear, switchboards, motor-control centers, and panelboards ampacity, and SCCR in amperes rms symmetrical.

3.3 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Comply with IEEE 242 for calculating short-circuit currents and determining coordination time intervals.

B. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

C. Base study on device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.

D. Extent of electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.

E. Begin analysis at the service, extending down to system overcurrent protective devices as follows:

1. To distribution system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less.

G. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a.   Inrush current when first energized.
b.   Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is specified for that transformer.
c.   Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by unusual loading or emergency conditions.

2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.

H. Motor Protection:

1. Select protection for low-voltage motors according to IEEE 242 and NFPA 70.

I. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P- 32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and protection recommendations in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

J. Generator Protection: Select protection according to manufacturer's written instructions and to IEEE 242.

K. Include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and asynchronous generators and apply to low voltage, three-phase ac systems. Also account for fault-current dc decrement, to address asymmetrical requirements of interrupting equipment.

L. Calculate short-circuit momentary for a three-phase bolted fault and a single line-to-ground fault at each equipment indicated on one-line diagram.

1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

M. Protective Device Evaluation:

1.   Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings.
2.   Adequacy of switchgear, motor-control centers, and panelboard bus bars to withstand short-circuit stresses.
3.   Include in the report identification of any protective device applied outside its capacity.

3.4 LOAD-FLOW AND VOLTAGE-DROP STUDY

A. Perform a load-flow and voltage-drop study to determine the steady-state loading profile of the system. Analyze power system performance two times as follows:

1.   Determine load flow and voltage drop based on full-load currents obtained in "Power System Data" Article.
2.   Determine load flow and voltage drop based on 80 percent of the design capacity of load buses.
3.   Prepare load-flow and voltage-drop analysis and report to show power system components that are overloaded, or might become overloaded; show bus voltages that are less than as prescribed by NFPA 70.

3.5 MOTOR-STARTING STUDY

A. Perform a motor-starting study to analyze the transient effect of system's voltage profile during motor starting. Calculate significant motor-starting voltage profiles and analyze the effects of motor starting on the power system stability.

B. Prepare the motor-starting study report, noting light flicker for limits proposed by IEEE 141, and voltage sags so as not to affect operation of other utilization equipment on system supplying the motor.

3.6 FIELD ADJUSTING

A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to recommended settings provided by the coordination study. Field adjustments shall be completed by the engineering service division of equipment manufacturer under the "Startup and Acceptance Testing" contract portion.

B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short- circuit and protective device coordination studies.

C. Testing and adjusting shall be by a full-time employee of the Field Adjusting Agency, who holds NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for all adjustable overcurrent protective devices.

END OF SECTION 260573.16

SECTION 260573.19 - ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

B. Field Adjusting Agency: An independent electrical testing agency with full-time employees and the capability to adjust devices and conduct testing indicated and that is a member company of NETA.

C. One-Line Diagram: A diagram that shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein.

D. Power System Analysis Software Developer: An entity that commercially develops, maintains, and distributes computer software used for power system studies.

E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located.

F. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion from the system.

G. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

H. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served.

I. Single-Line Diagram: See "One-Line Diagram."

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Study Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals may be in digital form:

1.   Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
2.   Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by Power Systems Analysis Specialist.
3.   Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data:
1. For Power System Analysis Specialist.

B. Product Certificates: For arc-flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with IEEE 1584 -2018 and NFPA 70E.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Provide maintenance procedures in equipment manuals according to requirements in NFPA 70E.
2. Operation and Maintenance Procedures: In addition to items Division 1 provide maintenance procedures for use by Owner's personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Study shall be performed using commercially developed and distributed software designed specifically for power system analysis.

B. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section.

C. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

D. Power System Analysis Software Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. Computer program shall be designed to perform arc-flash analysis or have a function, component, or add-on module designed to perform arc-flash analysis.
2. Computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development Professional certification.

E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the arc-flash study, analyzing the arc flash, and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.

F. Arc-Flash Study Certification: Arc-Flash Study Report shall be signed and sealed by Power Systems Analysis Specialist.

G. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1       COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
   A.   Providers:
1.   EasyPower, LLC (Formerly ESA Inc.
2.   ETAP – Digital Twin Platform
3.   SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
   B.   Comply with IEEE 1584-2018 and NFPA 70E.
   C.   Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

2.2
ARC-FLASH STUDY REPORT CONTENT
   A.   Executive summary of study findings.
   B.   Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpretation of results.
   C.   One-line diagram, showing the following:
       1.   Protective device designations and ampere ratings.
2.   Conductor types, sizes, and lengths.

3.   Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings, including derating factors and environmental conditions.
4.   Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.
5.   Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, panelboard designations, and ratings.

D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.

E. Short-Circuit Study Output Data: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output Reports" Paragraph in "Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573.13 "Short-Circuit Studies."

F. Protective Device Coordination Study Report Contents: As specified in "Coordination Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573.16 "Coordination Studies."

G. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations:

1.   Arcing fault magnitude.
2.   Protective device clearing time.
3.   Duration of arc.
4.   Arc-flash boundary.
5.   Restricted approach boundary.
6.   Limited approach boundary.
7.   Working distance.
8.   Incident energy.
9.   Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction.
10.   Electrode Configuration
11.   Box Dimensions

H. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of computer printout.

2.3 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for self- adhesive equipment labels. Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch self-adhesive equipment label for each work location included in the analysis.

B. Label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard analysis:

1.   Equipment Designation.
2.   Nominal voltage.
3.   Protection boundaries.

a.   Arc-flash boundary.
b.   Restricted approach boundary.
c.   Limited approach boundary.
4.   Available incident energy.
5.   Working distance.

6. Issue date.

C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study.

3.2 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study.

B. Preparatory Studies: Perform the Short-Circuit and Protective Device Coordination studies prior to starting the Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis.

1. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output Reports" Paragraph in "Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573.13 "Short- Circuit Studies."
2. Coordination Study Report Contents: As specified in "Coordination Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573.16 "Coordination Studies."

C. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size.

1. Maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.
2. Calculate arc-flash energy with the utility contribution at a minimum and assume no motor contribution.

D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in electrical distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts.

E. Include all low-voltage distribution equipment locations.

F. Calculate the limited and restricted approach boundaries for each location.

G. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as follows:

1. Fault contribution from induction motors shall not be considered beyond three to five cycles.

2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators shall be decayed to match the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (for example, contributions from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles).

H. Arc-flash energy shall generally be reported for the maximum of line or load side of a circuit breaker. However, arc-flash computation shall be performed and reported for both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows:

1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure.
2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location.

I. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584-2018, Section 6.9.

3.3 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis.

1.   Verify completeness of data supplied on one-line diagram on Drawings. Call discrepancies to Architect's attention.
2.   For new equipment, use characteristics from approved submittals under provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.
3.   For existing equipment, whether or not relocated, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys conducted by qualified technicians and engineers.

B. Electrical Survey Data: Gather and tabulate the following input data to support study. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 1584-2018 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. Data include, but are not limited to, the following:

10.   Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.
11.   For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.
12.   Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, size, and conductor material.
13.   Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.
14.   Low-voltage conductor sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic).

3.4 LABELING

A. Apply one arc-flash label on the front cover of each section of the equipment for each equipment included in the study. Base arc-flash label data on highest values calculated at each location.

B. Each piece of equipment listed below shall have an arc-flash label applied to it:

1.   Motor-control center.
2.   Low-voltage switchboard.
3.   Low-voltage Switchgear.
4.   Medium-voltage switch.
5.   Medium voltage transformers
6.   Safety Switches
7.   Panelboards.
8.   Enclosed Circuit Breakers.

C. Note on record Drawings the location of equipment where the personnel could be exposed to arc-flash hazard during their work.

1. Indicate arc-flash energy.

3.5 APPLICATION OF WARNING LABELS

A. Install arc-flash warning labels under the direct supervision and control of Power System Analysis Specialist.

END OF SECTION 260573.19

SECTION 260913 - ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following for monitoring ofelectrical power system:

1. Power monitoring gateways installed in switchgear, paralleling gear, and switchboards as indicated onthe single line diagrams.
a. Communication network and interface modules for RS-232 RS-485, BACNET TCP/IP, Modbus TCP/IP IEEE 802.3 data transmission protocols as required.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 23 Section "Energy Meters" for equipment to meter electricity consumption. Electricity Metering to be coordinated with Facilities Management E&E Campus Meter Shop. Meters in the Electrical Power Monitoring / Power monitoring system are not acceptable as substitutes for the Utility Metering in the related section unless approved by Facilities Management E&E Campus Meter Shop.

C. BACNET Protocol:
1. Each vendor utilizing the BACNet protocol shall contact the Facilities Management CCMS group for assignment of BACNet Device Instances that can be used. Every instance on campus must be unique.

D. Related Requirements:

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Active Power: The average power consumed by a unit. Also known as "real power."

B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value, such as current, flow, pressure, or temperature.

C. Apparent (Phasor) Power: "S = VI" where "S" is the apparent power, "V" is the rms value of the voltage, and "I" is the rms value of the current.

D. Ethernet: Local area network based on IEEE 802.3standards.

E. Firmware: Software (programs or data) that has been written onto read-only memory (ROM). Firmware is a combination of software and hardware. Storage media with ROMs that have data or programs recorded on them are firmware.

F. I/O: Input / output.

G. LAN: Local area network.

H. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or remote-control, signaling and power-limited circuits.

I. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data
1. Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment status data, metered electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event and alarm signals,tabulated reports, and event logs.

J. Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment status data, metered electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event and alarm signals, tabulated reports, and event logs.

K. N-G: Neutral to ground.

L. Power Factor: The ratio of active power to apparent power, sometimes expressed in percentage.

M. rms: Root-mean-square value of alternating voltage, which is the square root of the mean value of the square of the voltage values during a complete cycle.

N. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet.

O. THD: Total Harmonic Distortion.

P. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply; used both in singular and plural context.

Q. WAN: Wide Area Network.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Attach copies of approved Product Data submittals for products (such as switchboards and switchgear) that describe power monitoring and control features to illustrate coordination among related equipment and power monitoring and control.

B. Shop Drawings: For power monitoring and control equipment.

1.   Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2.   Outline Drawing: Indicate arrangement of components and clearances and access requirements.
3.   Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators, and other devices to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines.
4.   Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
5.   Wiring Diagram: For power, signal, and controlwiring. Coordinate nomenclature and presentationwith a block diagram
6.   UPS sizing calculations for workstation
7.   Surge Suppressors: Data for each device used and where applied.

C. Software and firmware Operational Documentation:.

1.   Self-study guide describing the process for setting equipment's network address; setting Owner's options; procedures to ensure data access from any PC on the network, using a standard Webbrowser; and recommended firewall setup.
2.   Software operating and upgrade manuals.
3.   Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compactdisc, complete with Owner- selected options.
4.   Device address list and the set point of each device and operator option, as set in applicationssoftware.

D. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future power system revisions or powermonitoring and control revisions.

E. Software licenses and upgrades required by and installed for operating and programming digital and analog devices.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power monitoring and control units, to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Operating and applications software documentation.

2.   Software licenses.
3.   Software Service agreement.
4.   PC installation and operating documentation, manuals, and software for the PC and all installed peripherals. Software shall include system restore, emergency boot diskettes, and drivers for all installed hardware. Provide separately for each PC.
5.   Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, design guides,user's guides for software and hardware, and PDFfiles on CD-ROM of the hard-copy submittal.

H. Other Informational Submittals:
1. Manufacturer's system installation and setup guides, with data forms to plan and record optionsand setup decisions:

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing power monitoring and control equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intendedlocation and application.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of distribution equipment and power monitoring and control components to form an integratedinterconnection of compatible components.
1. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.

B. Coordinate Work of this Section with those in Sections specifying distribution components that are monitored or controlled by power monitoring and control equipment.

1.7 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.

B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of

Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include the operating systems. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.
1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Ownerto upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A.   Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.   Addressable Relays: One for every 10 installed.Furnish at least one of each type.
2.   Data Line Surge Suppressors: One for every 10 ofeach type installed.   Furnish at least one of eachtype.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1       MANUFACTURERS
   A.   Manufacturers:   Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.   Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer products.
2.   Schneider Electric - Power Management Operation.
3.   GE Digital Energy
4.   Siemens Industry, Inc.
5.   Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.

2.2
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
   A.   Instrumentation and Recording Devices:   Monitor and record load profiles and chart energy consumption patterns.
1.   Calculate and Record the following:
a.   Load Factor.
2.   Measure and Record Metering Data for the Following:
a.   Electricity.
   B.   Power Quality Monitoring: Identify: power system anomalies and measure, display, and record trends andalarms of the following power quality parameters:
   1.   Voltage regulation and unbalance.
   2.   Continuous three-phase rms voltage.
   3.   Periodic max./min./avg. voltage samples.
   4.   Harmonics.

5. Voltage Excursions.

C. System: Report equipment status and Power System Control.

2.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Monitoring System: Provide power monitoring gateway to enable communications between Building Automation System (provided by Div. 25) and each meter and circuit breaker trip unit in service-entrance switchgear, service-entrance switchboard, and generator parallelinggear. Include Web access to software and capability for PC-based workstation with graphics capability, withits operating system and application software, connected to data transmission network.

B. Surge Protection: For external wiring of each conductor entry connection to components to protect components from voltage surges originating external toequipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads.

1. Minimum Protection for Power Lines 120 V and More:Auxiliary panel suppressors complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Short-Circuit Studies” and Coordination Studies.”
2. Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low-Voltage Power Lines: Comply with requirements as recommended by manufacturer for type of line being protected.

C. Addressable Devices: All transmitters and receivers shall communicate unique device identification and status reports to monitoring and control clients.

1. Indoor installation in nontemperature-controlled spaces that have environmental controls to maintain ambient conditions of minus 60 deg to 95 deg F dry bulb and 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.
2. Comply with IEC 60529 degree of protection code of IP65 for the front of the meter, and code of IP30 for the body.

D.   BAS Interface: Provide factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, display, and record data for use in processing reports.
1.   Hardwired Monitoring Points: Electrical power demand (kilowatts), electrical power consumption(kilowatt-hours), power factor.
2.   ASHRAE 135 (BACnet) or Modbus communication interface with the BAS (as required for BAS interface) shall enable the BAS operator to remotely monitor meter information from a BAS operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at meteringpanel shall be available through the BAS.

2.4 OPERATING SYSTEM

A. Software: Configured to run on a portable laptop computer, PC, with capability for accessing multiple devices simultaneously. Modbus TCP/IP, RS-232, and RS-485 digital Communications.

B. Operating System Software: Based on 64-bit, Microsoft Windows workstation operating system. Software shallhave the following features:

1.   Multiuser and multitasking to allow independent activities and monitoring to occur simultaneouslyat different workstations.
2.   Graphical user interface to show pull-down menusand a menu tree format.
3.   Capability for future additions within theindicated system size limits.

2.5 APPLICATION SOFTWARE

A. Basic Requirements:
1. Fully compatible with and based on the approvedoperating system.

2. Password-protected operator login and access;three levels, minimum.

3. Password-protected setup functions.

4. Context-sensitive online help.

5. Capability of creating, deleting, and copying files; and automatically maintaining a directory of all files, including size and location of each sequential and random- ordered record.

6. Capability for importing custom icons into graphic views to represent alarms and I/O devices.

7. Automatic and encrypted backups for database andhistory; automatically stored at selected workstation and encrypted with a nine-characteralphanumeric password, which must be used to restore or read data contained in backup.

8. Operator audit trail for recording and reporting all changes made to user-defined system options.

B. Data Formats:

1. User-programmable export and import of data to and from commonly used Microsoft Windows spreadsheet, database, billing, and other applications; using dynamic data exchange technology.

2. Options to convert reports and graphics to HTMLformat.

3. Interactive Graphics.

4. Option to send preprogrammed or operator designede-mail reports.

C. Metered Data: Display metered values in real time.

D. Equipment Documentation: Database for recording of equipment ratings and characteristics; with capabilityfor graphic display on monitors.

E. Graphics: Interactive color-graphics platform with pull-down menus and mouse-driven generation of power system graphics, in formats widely used for such drafting; to include the following:

1. Stie Plan.

2. Floor Plans.

3. Equipment elevations.

4. Single-Line Diagrams.

F. User-Defined Monitoring and Control Events: Display and record with date and time stamps accurate to 0.1second, and including the following:

1.   Operator log on/off.
2.   Attempted operator log on/off.
3.   All Alarms.
4.   Equipment Operation counters.
5.   Out-of-Limit, Pickup, Trips, and No-Response Events

G. Trending Reports: Display data acquired in real-timefrom different meters or devices, in historical formatover user-defined time; unlimited as to interval, duration, or quantity of trends.

1. Spreadsheet functions of sum, delta, percent,average, mean, standard deviation, and relatedfunctions applied to recorded data.

2. Charting, statistical, and display functions ofstandard Windows-based spreadsheet.

H. Alarms: Display and record alarm messages from discrete input and controls outputs, according to userprogrammable protocol.

1. Functions requiring user acknowledgment shall runin background during computer use for other applications and override other presentations when they occur:

I. Waveform Data: Display and record waveforms on demandor automatically on an alarm or programmed event. Include the graphic displays of the following, based on user- specified criteria:

1. Phase voltages, phase currents, and residualcurrent.

2. Overlay of three-phase currents, and overlay eachphase voltage and current.

3. Waveforms ranging in length from 2 cycles to 5minutes.

4. Disturbance and steady-state waveforms up to 512points per cycle.

5. Transient waveforms up to 83,333 points per cycleon 60-Hz base.

6.   Calculated waveform, based on recorded data, on aminimum of four cycles of data of the following:
a.   THD.
b.   rms magnitudes.
c.   Peak Values
d.   Crest Factors.
e.   Magnitude of individual harmonics.

J. Data Sharing Trend Curves: Provide for recording four trend curves at intervals of one minute, one hour, one day, or one month; and forecast values for the trended parameters.

1. Tabular data shall be in the comma-separatedvalues:

K. Reporting: User commands initiate the reporting of a list of current alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in system or a log of past events.

1. Print a record of user-defined alarm, supervisory,and trouble events on workstation printer.

2. Sort and report by device name and by function.

3. Report type of signal (alarm, supervisory, ortrouble), description, date, and time of occurrence.

4. Differentiate alarm signals from other indications.

5. When system is reset, report reset event with sameinformation concerning device, location, date, and time.

2.6 COMMUNICATION COMPONENTS AND NETWORKS

A. Network Configuration: High-speed, multi-access, opennonproprietary, industry standard communication protocol; LANs complying with EIA 485, 100 Base-T Ethernet, and Modbus TCP/IP.

2.7 STANDALONE, WEB-ENABLED MONITORING INSTRUMENT

A. Separately mounted, mounted, permanently installed instrumentfor power monitoring and control.
1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Environmental Conditions: System components shall be capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability.
1. Indoor installation in non-temperature-controlled spaces that have environmental controls to maintain ambient conditions of 0-122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

C. Power-Distribution Equipment Monitor: Web enabled, with integral network port and embedded Web server with factory-configured firmware and HTML-formatted Web pages for viewing of power monitoring and equipment status information from connected devices equipped withdigital communication ports.

D. LAN Connectivity: Multipoint, RS-485 Modbus serial communication network, interconnecting all breaker trip units, protective relays, drivers, and metering devices equipped with communications. Serial Communication network connected to Ethernet server that functions as a gateway and server, providing data access via 100 Base-T LAN.

E. Communication Devices within the Equipment: Addressedat factory and tested to verify reliable communicationwith network server.

F.   Server Configuration:
1.   Initial network parameters set using a standard Web browser. Connect via a local operator interface, or an RJ-45 port accessible from frontof equipment.
2.   Network server shall be factory programmed with embedded HTML-formatted Web pages that are user configurable and that provide detailed communication diagnostic information for serial and Ethernet ports as status of RS-485 network; with internal memory management information pagesfor viewing using a standard Web browser.
3.   Login: Password protected; password administration accessible from the LAN using astandard Web browser.
4.   Operating Software: Suitable for local access;firewall protected.

G. Data Access:
1. Network server shall include embedded HTML pages providing real-time information from devices connected to RS-485 network ports via a standard Web browser.

H. Equipment Monitoring Options: Login shall be followedby a main menu for selecting summary Web pages that follow.

I.   Summary Web pages shall be factory configured to display the following information for each communicating device within the power equipment lineup:
1.   User-Configured Custom Home Page: Provide for thelineup, showing status-at-a- glance of key operating values.
2.   Circuit Summary Page: Circuit name, three-phase average rms current, power (kW), power factor, andbreaker status.
3.   Load Current Summary Page:   Circuit name, Phase A, B, and C rms current values.
4.   Demand Current Summary Page:   Circuit name, Phase A, B, and C average demand current values.
5.   Power Summary Page:   Circuit name, present demandpower (kW), peak demand power (kW), and recorded time and date.
6.   Energy Summary Page:   Circuit name, energy (kWh), reactive energy (kVARh), and time/date of last reset.
7.   Transformer Status Page:   Transformer tag, coil temperatures, and cooling fan status.
8.   Motor-Control Center Status Page: Circuit name, three-phase average rms current, thermal capacity(percentage), and drive output frequency (Hz) contactor status.
9.   Specific Device Pages: Each individual communicating device shall display detailed, real-time information, as appropriate for device type.
a.   Display historical energy data that shall be logged automatically for each device, as appropriate for device type.
b.   Display historical data logged from each device in graphical time-trend plots. Value to be displayed on time-trend plot shall be user selectable. Time interval to be displayed on scale shall be for previous dayor week.
10.   Export historical energy data to a PC or workstation through network using FTP (File Transfer Protocol). Format exported data in a CSV (Comma Separated Variable) file format for importing into spreadsheet applications.

J. Communications:

1. Power Monitor: Permanently connected to communicate via RS-485 Modbus TCP/IP or Modbus TCPvia a 100 Base-T Ethernet.
2. Local Plug-In Connections: RS-232 and 100 Base-TuEthernet.

2.8 ALARM INTERFACE

A.   BAS Shall monitor Power Monitor Alarm Points. CCMS Will set up alarm and routing of critical alarms. Critical points to monitor for alarming shall be.
1.   Building Power
2.   Generator Run Status
3.   Transfer Switch Status
4.   UPS Data Points

B. Pager System Interface: Alarms shall be able to activate a pager system with customized message foreach input alarm.

1. RS-232 output shall be capable of connection to apager interface that can be used to call a paging system or service and send a signal to a portable pager. System shall allow an individual alphanumeric message per alarm input to be sent to paging system. This interface shall support bothnumeric and alphanumeric pagers.

C. Alarm System Interface:

1. RS-232 output shall be capable of transmitting alarms from other monitoring and alarm systems toworkstation software.

D. Cables:

1.   PVC-Jacketed, RS-232 Cable: Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, polypropylene insulation, and individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage; PVC jacket. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain wire.
a.   NFPA 70, Type CM.
b.   Flame Resistance: UL 1581, Vertical Tray.
2.   Plenum-Type, RS-232 Cable: Paired 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, Stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, plastic insulation, and individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage; plastic jacket. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain wire.
a.   NFPA 70, Type CMP.
b.   Flame Resistance: NFAP 262, Flame Test.

2.9 LAN CABLES

A.   RS-485 Cable:
1.   PVC-Jacketed RS-485 Cable: Paired, 2 pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, PVCjacket, and NFPA 70, Type CMG.
2.   Plenum-Type, RS-485 Cable: Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-propylene insulation, unshielded, and fluorinated-ethylene-propylene jacket, and NFPA 70, Type CMP.

B. Unshielded Twisted Pair Cables: Category 6 as specified for horizontal cable for data service.

2.10 LOW VOLTAGE WIRING

A. Comply with Division 26 Sections "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Low Voltage Control Cable: Multiple conductor, color- coded, No. 20 AWG copper, minimum.

1. Sheath: PVC; except in plenum-type spaces, usesheath listed for plenums.

2. Ordinary Switching Circuits: Three conductorsunless otherwise indicated.

3. Switching Circuits with Pilot Lights or Locator Feature: Five conductors unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use NRTL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

D. Install LAN cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with specified category rating of components and that ensure specified categoryperformance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.

E. Install cables without damaging conductors, shield, orjacket.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification forElectrical Systems.”

B. Label each power monitoring and control module with aunique designation.

3.4 NETWORK NAMING AND NUMBERING

A. Coordinate with Owner and provide unique naming and addressing for networks and devices.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. For data communication wiring, comply with NECA/BICSI 568.

B. Comply with IEEE 1100, "Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1.   Electrical Tests: Use caution when testing devices containing solid-state components.
2.   Continuity tests of circuits.
3.   Operational Tests: Set and operate controls at workstation and at monitored and controlled devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities. Use a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions as recommended by manufacturer. Submit sequences forapproval. Note response to each test command andoperation. Note time intervals between initiationof alarm conditions and registration of alarms atcentral-processing workstation.
a.   Coordinate testing required by this Section with that required by Sections specifying equipment being monitored and controlled
b.   Test LANs for communication and connectivity.
c.   System components with battery backup shall be operated on battery power for a period ofnot less than 10 percent of calculated battery operating time.
d.   Verify accuracy of graphic screens and icons.
e.   Metering Test: Load feeders, measure loads on feeders conductor with an rms reading clamp-on ammeter, and simultaneously read indicated current on the same phase at central-processing workstation. Record and compare values measured at the two locations. Resolve discrepancies greater than 5 percentand record resolution method and results.
f.   Record metered values, control settings,operations, cues, time intervals, and functional observations and submit test reports printed by workstation printer.

D. Power monitoring and control equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests andinspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

F. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified requirements are met.

G. Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible agency and representative.

H. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.

I. Remove and replace malfunctioning devices and circuitsand retest as specified above.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A.   Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems. See Division 01 Section "Contract Close Out.”
1.   Train Owner's management and maintenance personnel in interpreting and using monitoring displays and in configuring and using software and reports. Include troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and maintaining equipment. Provide a minimum of 12 hours' training.
2.   Training Aid: Use approved final versions of software and maintenance manuals as training aids.

3.8 ON-SITE ASISTANCE

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

END OF SECTION 260913

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL ANALOG PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Audio Visual Lighting Controls: Requirements for room utilizing the campus AV fall under a different specification. Contact the DIT-ATI group for that specifications in classrooms or conference rooms that have this program requirement

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.   Time switches.
2.   Photoelectric switches.
3.   Daylight-harvesting controls.
4.   Indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors.
5.   High-bay occupancy sensors.
6.   Lighting contactors.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 26 “Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for wall-box dimmers, non- networkable wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.

1.3 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Distributed lighting control system shall accommodate the square-footage coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors, switches, daylighting sensors and accessories that suit the required lighting and electrical system parameters.

B. System shall conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

C. System shall comply with FCC emission standards specified in part 15, sub-part J for commercial and residential application.

D. System shall be listed under UL sections 916 and/or 508.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330 Submittal Procedure.

B.   Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.   Catalog sheets and specifications.
2.   Ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service condition requirements, and installed features.
3.   Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4.   Installation instructions.

C.   Shop Drawings:
1.   Composite wiring and/or schematic diagram of each control circuit as proposed to be installed.
2.   Show location of all devices, including at minimum sensors, load controllers, and switches/dimmers for each area on reflected ceiling plans.
3.   Provide room/area details including products and sequence of operation for each room or area. Illustrate typical acceptable room/area connection topologies.

D. Manufacturer’s Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing of centralized and distributed lighting control systems with a minimum of 10 years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company certified by the manufacturer and specializing in installation of networked lighting control products with minimum three years documented experience.

C. System Components: Demonstrate that individual components have undergone quality control and testing prior to shipping.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.   Maintain
1.   Ambient temperature: 32 to 104 degrees F.
2.   Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace lighting control devices that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Faulty operation of lighting control devices.

2. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 GENERAL INTENT LIGHTING CONTROL ANALOG SYSTEMS

A. The intent of applying lighting control for UMD buildings is to utilize hardwired analog devices consisting of sensors, switches and controllers with wire conductor connections. The controls shall be set up as occupancy, vacancy or manually controlled as coordinated with the project documents. Scheduled lighting shall be operated by an analog timeclock that is an interconnected component within the localized control system, with no BMS or LAN interface. Hallways, stairwell, lobby, exit, or emergency egress lighting needed to support emergency egress requirements, shall remain lit continuously and not be connected to local wall switches.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRONIC TIME SWITCHES

A.   Manufactures:
1.   Leviton
2.   Lutron
3.   Eaton
4.   Acuity
5.   WattStopper

B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.

1.   Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and application.
2.   Contact Configuration: SPST, DPST, DPDT – coordinate with building wiring.
3.   Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac.
4.   Programs: Eight on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.
5.   Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a program.
6.   Automatic daylight savings time changeover.
7.   Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.

2.2 ELECTROMECHANICAL DIAL-TIME SWITCHES

A.   Manufactures:
1.   Leviton
2.   Lutron
3.   Eaton
4.   Acuity
5.   WattStopper

B. Electromechanical-Dial Time Switches: Comply with UL 917.

1.   Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.   Contact Configuration: SPST, DPST, DPDT – coordinate with building wiring.
3.   Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac Five subparagraphs below describe optional features.
4.   Circuitry: Allows connection of a photoelectric relay as a substitute for the on-off function of a program.
5.   Astronomic time dial.
6.   Eight-Day Program: Uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays.
7.   Skip-a-day mode.
8.   Wound-spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures, minimum of 16 hours.

2.3 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES, SOLID STATE, FLEXIBLE MOUNTING

A.   Manufactures:
1.   Leviton
2.   Lutron
3.   Eaton
4.   Acuity
5.   WattStopper

B. Description: Solid state, with SPST, DPST – coordinate with building wiring; dry contacts rated for 1000 W incandescent or 1800 VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A, and compatible with ballasts and LED lamps.

1.   Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a agency NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.
2.   Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of the photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off.
3.   Time Delay: Fifteen-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
4.   Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor.
5.   Mounting: Twist lock complies with ANSI C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure from same source and manufacturer as switch.
6.   Failure Mode: Luminaire stays ON.

2.4 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES, SOLID STATE, LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED

A.   Manufactures:
1.   Leviton
2.   Lutron
3.   Eaton
4.   Acuity
5.   WattStopper

B. Description: Solid state, with SPST, DPST – coordinate with building wiring; dry contacts rated for 1000 W incandescent or 1800 VA inductive, to operate connected load, complying with UL 773, and compatible with CFL and LED lamps.

1.   Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.   Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.
3.   Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
4.   Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type.
5.   Mounting: Twist lock complying with ANSI C136.10, with base, from same source and manufacturer as switch.
6.   Failure Mode: Luminaire stays ON.

2.5 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES, LOW VOLTAGE

A.   Manufactures:
1.   Leviton
2.   Lutron
3.   Eaton
4.   Acuity
5.   WattStopper

B. Description: Solid state; one set of NO dry contacts rated for 24 V dc at 1 A or 24 V ac at 1 A (coordinate with building wiring), to operate connected load, complying with UL 773, and compatible with luminaires

1.   Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.   Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.
3.   Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
4.   Mounting: 1/2-inch threaded male conduit.
5.   Failure Mode: Luminaire stays ON.
6.   Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast or LED load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

a. LED status lights to indicate load status.
b. Plenum rated.

2.6 DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING CONTROLS

A.   Manufactures:
1.   Leviton
2.   Lutron
3.   Eaton
4.   Acuity
5.   WattStopper

B. Description: System operates indoor lighting.

C. Sequence of Operation: Sensing daylight and electrical lighting levels, the system adjusts the indoor electrical lighting levels. As daylight increases, lights are dimmed.

1. Lighting control set point is based on two lighting conditions:

a.   When no daylight is present.
b.   When significant daylight is present (target level).
c.   System programming is done with two hand-held, remote-control tools.

D. Ceiling-Mounted Photosensor : Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, that detects changes in indoor lighting levels that are perceived by the eye.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:

1.   Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.   Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F.
3.   Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated power pack, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered by the power pack.
4.   Sensor Output: 0 to 10 volt DC dimming signal to operate luminaires.
5.   Sensor type: Closed loop.
6.   Light-Level Sensor Set-Point Adjustment Range: 20 to 60 fc.
7.   Zone: Single or Multi as called for on drawings or schedule.
8.   Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast or LED load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

a. LED status lights to indicate load status.
b. Plenum rated.

2.7 INDOOR OCCUPANCY AND VACANCY SENSORS

A.   Manufactures:
1.   Leviton
2.   Lutron
3.   Eaton
4.   Acuity
5.   WattStopper

B. General Requirements for Sensors:

1.   Wall or Ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors.
2.   Dual technology.
3.   Hardwired connection to controller.
4.   Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
5.   Operation:

a.   Occupancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
b.   Vacancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, lights are manually turned on and sensor turns lights off when the room is unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
c.   Combination Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, sensor shall be programmed to turn lights on when coverage area is occupied and turn them off when unoccupied, or to turn off lights that have been manually turned on; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
6.   Power: low voltage.
7.   Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast or LED load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.
8.   Mounting:

a.   Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
b.   Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure.
c.   Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.

9. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor.
10. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected lighting level is present.

C. PIR Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement.

1.   Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in.
2.   Detection Coverage (Room, Ceiling Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.
3.   Detection Coverage (Corridor, Ceiling Mounted): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot-high ceiling.
4.   Detection Coverage (Room, Wall Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180- degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area of 2000 square feet above finished floor.

D. Ultrasonic Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes of reflected ultrasonic energy.

1.   Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.
2.   Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.
3.   Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.
4.   Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.
5.   Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet.
6.   Detection Coverage (Room, Wall Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180- degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area of 2000 square feet above finished floor.

E. Dual-Technology Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1.   Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.
2.   Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.
3.   Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.
4.   Detection Coverage (Room, Wall Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180- degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area of 2000 square feet above finished floor.

2.8 HIGH-BAY OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A.   Manufactures:
1.   Leviton
2.   Lutron
3.   Eaton
4.   Acuity
5.   WattStopper

B. Description: Solid-state unit. The unit is designed to operate with the lamp and ballasts indicated.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2. Operation: Turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and to half-power when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights to half-power that is adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 16 minutes.

3.   Continuous Lamp Monitoring: When lamps are dimmed continuously for 24 hours, automatically turn lamps on to full power for 15 minutes for every 24 hours of continuous dimming.
4.   Power: Line voltage.
5.   Operating Ambient Conditions: 32 to 149 deg F.
6.   Mounting: Threaded pipe.
7.   Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.
8.   Detector Technology: PIR.
9.   Power and dimming control from the luminaire ballast that has been modified to include the dimming capacitor.

C. Detector Coverage: User selectable by interchangeable PIR lenses, suitable for mounting heights from 12 to 50 feet.

D. Accessories: Obtain manufacturer's installation and maintenance kit with laser alignment tool for sensor positioning and power port connectors.

2.9 LIGHTING CONTACTORS

A.   Manufactures:
1.   Leviton
2.   Lutron
3.   Eaton
4.   Acuity
5.   WattStopper

B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination-type lighting contactors with fusible switch, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.

1.   Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less THD of normal load current).
2.   Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation.
3.   Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.
4.   Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings or scheduled, matching the NEMA type specified for the enclosure.

2.10 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 22 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 16 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Do not begin installation until measurements have been verified and work areas have been properly prepared.

B. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

C. Verify that required pre-installation meeting specified in Part 1 of this specification has been completed, recorded meeting minutes have been distributed and all outstanding issues noted have been resolved prior to the start of installation.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

B. Examine walls and ceilings for suitable conditions where lighting control devices will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

C. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure- borne vibration unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

3.5 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower- limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting control devices and perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1.   Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.
2.   Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.   See Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.

D. The selection, location and number of occupancy sensors will be such that the coverage range for minor motion detection by the least effective of the two technologies will not be exceeded, where minor motion coverage is typical for sedentary occupants.

1.   Where more than one sensor is required to provide full coverage of the space area, then the number of sensors will be such that the minor motion coverage range of individual sensors will overlap in the areas between sensors.
2.   Occupancy sensors shall be installed according to manufacturer’s recommendations for location, obstructions, spacing and the directional sensing, but in general shall be installed:
a.   Ceiling mounted: Directly over the desk or relevant work area, or if in a common work area, then in the center of the rooms.
b.   Wall mounted: in a straight-on, unobstructed direct view of the person at the desk or relevant work area.
3.   If Necessary to prevent false-ons from corridor traffic, blinders or masking shall be installed over the applicable portions of the lens to prevent detection of movement in the adjacent space. Ultrasonic sensor transducers, if directional shall be directed away from corridors and adjacent spaces.
4.   Sensitivity shall be adjusted so that lights come on within one or two steps of a person entering the room.

E. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 LIGHTING CONTROL SEQUENCE

A.   Generally, sequences for these local lighting controls is as follows:
1.   Where Auto OFF is specified the default shall be a 30 minute timeout unless utilized in a space that is not typically occupied (i.e. storage rooms)
2.   Classrooms, offices, and non-public spaces will generally be programmed as Manual ON to 50% / Auto OFF.
3.   Conference rooms, Manual ON to 50% / Auto OFF with dimming and Manual OFF Capability (Scene control if program request).
4.   Copy rooms, break rooms, locker rooms, restrooms & storage rooms, Auto ON 100% / Auto OFF. No dimming required.
5.   Laboratory areas shall not be provided with occupancy sensors. Provide dimmers with Manual ON / Manual OFF in these areas.
6.   Lobbies and public gathering spaces, provide dimming and (and scene control as defined by building program.

B. Hallways, stairwell, lobby, exit, or emergency egress lighting needed to support emergency egress requirements, shall remain lit continuously and not be connected to local wall switches.

C. In main mechanical and electrical rooms provide manual switches for these room. Where code requires occupancy sensors rooms shall be circuited so that the occupancy sensor controlled fixtures account for no more than 50% of fixtures and the room must be circuited so that every other light will stay “ON” based on manual switch position.

D. The outdoor lighting for sidewalks, parking lots and street shall be controlled via central photocell to turn the lights on; do not place photo cell in an area that is shaded during occupied hours. Provide a “Hand- Off-Auto” (HOA) switch to operate the lights manually. The HOA switch shall be mounted in an area not accessible to the general public.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting lighting control devices to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

1.   For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.
2.   For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's operations.
3.   Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements for low-voltage, programmable lighting control systems specified in Section 260943.16 "Addressable-Luminaire Lighting Controls" and Section 260943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting Controls."

B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.

END OF SECTION 260923

SECTION 260943 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM – DIGITAL

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1   RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.   Audio Visual Lighting Controls: Requirements for room utilizing the campus AV fall under a different specification. Contact the DIT-ATI group for that specifications in classrooms or conference rooms that have this program requirement.
1.2   SUMMARY
A.   Section includes
1.   Digital lighting and plugload controllers
2.   Digital indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors
3.   Digital photosensor
4.   Digital switches
5.   Digital timeclock
1.3   DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.   Distributed lighting control system shall accommodate the square-footage coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors, switches, daylighting sensors and accessories that suit the required lighting and electrical system parameters.
B.   System shall conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
C.   System shall comply with FCC emission standards specified in part 15, sub-part J for commercial and residential application.
D.   System shall be listed under UL sections 916 and/or 508.
1.4   SUBMITTALS
A.   Submit under provisions of Section 01330 Submittal Procedure.
B.   Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.   Catalog sheets and specifications.
2.   Ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service condition requirements, and installed features.
3.   Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4.   Installation instructions.
C.   Shop Drawings: Wiring diagrams a for the various components of the System specified including:
1.   Composite wiring and/or schematic diagram of each control circuit as proposed to be installed.

2.   Show location of all devices, including at minimum sensors, load controllers, and switches/dimmers for each area on reflected ceiling plans.
3.   Provide room/area details including products and sequence of operation for each room or area. Illustrate typical acceptable room/area connection topologies.
D.   Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E.   Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
1.5   QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.   Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing of centralized and distributed lighting control systems with a minimum of 10 years documented experience.
B.   Installer Qualifications: Company certified by the manufacturer and specializing in installation of networked lighting control products with minimum three years documented experience.
C.   System Components: Demonstrate that individual components have undergone quality control and testing prior to shipping.
1.6   DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.   Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation.
1.7   PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.   Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer. Do not install products in environmental conditions outside manufacturer's limits.
1.   Ambient temperature: 32 to 104 degrees F.
2.   Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.
1.8   WARRANTY
A.   Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace lighting control devices that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period of Two years from date of substantial completion.
1.   Failures include but are not limited to the following
a.   Faulty Operation of lighting control devices.
2.   Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion
B.   Products Warranty: Manufacturer shall provide a 2 year limited warranty on products within this installation, except where otherwise noted, and consisting of a one for one device replacement.
1.9   GENERAL INTENT LIGHTING CONTROL DIGITAL SYSTEMS
A.   The intent of applying lighting control for UMD buildings where scheduling of spaces is required is to utilize hardwired digital devices consisting of sensors, switches and controllers with ethernet CAT5 connections. The controls shall be set up as occupancy, vacancy or

manually controlled as coordinated with the project documents. Scheduled lighting shall be operated by a digital timeclock that is an interconnected component within the localized control system, with no BMS or LAN interface. Hallways, stairwell, lobby, exit, or emergency egress lighting needed to support emergency egress requirements, shall remain lit continuously and not be connected to local wall switches unless otherwise specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1   MANUFACTURERS
A.   Manufactures:
1.   Leviton
2.   Lutron
3.   Eaton
4.   Acuity
5.   Basis of Design Manufacturer: WattStopper “DLM” System
2.2   DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A.   Provide digital lighting control system complete with all necessary enclosures, wiring, and system components to ensure a complete and properly functioning system as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
1.   Space Control Requirements: Provide occupancy/vacancy sensors with Automatic- On, Manual-On or Partial-On functionality as indicated.
2.   Daylit Areas: Provide daylight-responsive automatic control where daylight contribution is available as required by relevant local building energy code:
a.   All luminaires within code-defined daylight zones shall be controlled separately from luminaires outside of daylit zones.
b.   Daytime setpoints for total ambient illumination (combined daylight and electric light) levels that initiate dimming shall be programmed in compliance with relevant local building energy codes.
c.   Multiple-level switched daylight harvesting controls may be utilized for areas marked on drawings.
d.   Provide smooth and continuous daylight dimming for areas marked on drawings. Daylighting control system may be designed to turn off electric lighting when daylight is at or above required lighting levels, only if system functions to turn lamps back on at dimmed level, rather than turning full-on prior to dimming.
B.   Digital lighting control system includes the following equipment:
1.   Digital Controllers: Self-configuring, digitally addressable one, two or three relay plenum-rated controllers for on/off control. Selected models include 0-10 volt or line voltage forward phase control dimming outputs and integral current monitoring capabilities.
2.   Digital Occupancy Sensors: Self-configuring, digitally addressable, calibrated occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR) programming communications.
3.   Digital Switches: Self-configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton on/off, dimming, and scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) programming communications.
4.   Digital Photosensors: Single-zone closed loop, multi-zone open loop sensors for daylight harvesting using switching, bi-level, tri-level or dimming control.

5.   Digital Timeclock: Astronomic with programming for date, time, location, holidays, event scheduling, button binding and groups.
6.   CAT5 Cables with RJ-45 Connectors: Provides both data communication signal and low voltage power to devices.
2.3   DIGITAL CONTROLLERS
A.   Digital controllers include the following features
1.   Automatic configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room.
2.   Simple replacement using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf device.
3.   Device Status LEDs to indicate:
a.   Data transmission
b.   Device has power
c.   Status for each load
d.   Configuration status
4.   Quick installation features including:
a.   Standard junction box mounting
b.   Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable
5.   Based on individual configuration, each load shall be capable of the following behavior on power up following the loss of normal power:
a.   Turn on to 100 percent
b.   Turn off
c.   Turn on to last level
6.   Each load be configurable to operate in the following sequences based on occupancy:
a.   Auto-on/Auto-off (Follow on and off)
b.   Manual-on/Auto-off (Follow off only)
7.   UL 2043 plenum rated
8.   Manual override and LED indication for each load
9.   Zero cross circuitry for each load
10.   All digital parameter data programmed into an individual room controller or plug load controller shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the controller. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.
11.   Dimming Room Controllers shall share the following features:
a.   Each load shall have an independently configurable preset on level for Normal Hours and After Hours events to allow different dimmed levels to be established at the start of both Normal Hours and After Hours events.
b.   Fade rates for dimming loads specific to bound switch buttons.
c.   The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:
1)   Establish preset level for each load from 0-100 percent
2)   Set high and low trim for each load
3)   Initiate lamp burn in for each load of either 0, 12 or 100 hours
d.   Override button for each load provides the following functions:
1)   Press and release for on/off control
2)   Press and hold for dimming control
e.   Each dimming output channel shall have an independently configurable minimum and maximum calibration trim level to set the dimming range to match the true dynamic range of the connected ballast or driver. LED level

indicators on bound dimming switches shall utilize this new maximum and minimum trim.
f.   Each dimming output channel shall have an independently configurable minimum and maximum trim level to set the dynamic range of the output within the new 0-100 percent dimming range defined by the minimum and maximum calibration trim.
g.   Calibration and trim levels set per output channel.
B.   On/Off Lighting Controllers shall include:
1.   Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz) capable rated for 20A total load
2.   One or two relay configuration
3.   24V output with 150 mA load capacity
4.   Three RJ-45 ports for connection to CAT5 cabling
C.   On/Off Plugload Controllers shall include:
1.   Line voltage (120 VAC, 60 Hz) rated for 20A receptacle load control
2.   Single relay configuration
3.   24V output with 150 mA load capacity
4.   Three RJ-45 ports for connection to CAT5 cabling
D.   On/Off/0-10V Dim Lighting Controllers shall include:
1.   Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz) capable or 347 VAC, 60 Hz. 120/277 volt models rated for 20A total load; 347 volt models rated for 15A total load
2.   Built in real time current monitoring
3.   One, two or three relays configurations
4.   24V output with 250 mA load capacity
5.   Four RJ-45 ports for connection to CAT5 cabling
6.   One dimming output per relay
a.   0-10V Dimming - Where indicated, one 0-10 volt analog output per relay for control of compatible ballasts and LED drivers. The 0-10 volt output shall automatically open upon loss of power to the Room Controller to assure full light output from the controlled lighting.
E.   On/Off/Forward Phase Dim Lighting Controllers shall include:
1.   Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz) rated for 20A total load, with forward phase dimmed loads derating to 16A for some load types
2.   Built in real time current monitoring
3.   One or two relays configurations
4.   24V output with 250 mA load capacity
5.   Four RJ-45 ports for connection to CAT5 cabling
6.   One dimming output per relay
a.   Line Voltage, Forward Phase Dimming - Where indicated, one forward phase control line voltage dimming output per relay for control of compatible two- wire or three-wire ballasts, LED drivers, MLV, forward phase compatible ELV, neon/cold cathode and incandescent loads.
2.4   DIGITAL WALL OR CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A.   Digital occupancy sensor features include the following:
1.   Digital calibration and pushbutton configuration for the following variables:
a.   Sensitivity, 0-100 percent in 10 percent increments

b.   Time delay, 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments
c.   Test mode, Five second time delay
d.   Detection technology, PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation and/or re- activation.
e.   Walk-through mode
2.   Programmable control functionality including:
a.   Each sensor may be programmed to control specific loads within a local network.
b.   Sensor shall be capable of activating one of 16 user-definable lighting scenes.
c.   Adjustable retrigger time period for manual-on loads. Load will retrigger (turn on) automatically within a configurable period of time (default 10 seconds) after turning off.
d.   On dual technology sensors, independently configurable trigger modes are available for both Normal (NH) and After Hours (AH) time periods. The retrigger mode can be programmed to use the following technologies:
e.   Ultrasonic and Passive Infrared
f.   Ultrasonic or Passive Infrared
g.   Ultrasonic only
h.   Passive Infrared only
i.   Independently configurable sensitivity settings for passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies (on dual technology sensors) for both Normal (NH) and After Hour (AH) time periods.
3.   24V operating power
4.   Two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to CAT5 cabling.
5.   Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls.
6.   All digital parameter data programmed into an individual occupancy sensor shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the sensor. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.
2.5   DIGITAL OCCUPANCY SENSOR-SWITCHES
A.   Digital occupancy sensor-switches features include the following:
1.   Digital calibration and pushbutton configuration for the following variables:
a.   Sensitivity: 0-100 percent in 10 percent increments
b.   Time delay: 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments
c.   Test mode: Five second time delay
d.   Detection technology: PIR, Dual Technology activation and/or re-activation.
e.   Walk-through mode
2.   Programmable control functionality including:
a.   Each sensor may be programmed to control a specific load.
b.   Sensor shall be capable of activating one of 16 user-definable lighting scenes.
c.   Adjustable retrigger time period for manual-on loads.
d.   On dual technology sensors, independently configurable trigger modes are available for both Normal (NH) and After Hours (AH) time periods. The retrigger mode can be programmed to use the following technologies:
1)   Ultrasonic and Passive Infrared
2)   Ultrasonic or Passive Infrared
3)   Ultrasonic only
4)   Passive Infrared only

3.   Independently sensitivity settings for passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies (on dual technology sensors) for both Normal (NH) and After Hour (AH) time periods.
4.   Pushbuttons with LED light indicating power and load status
5.   Pushbuttons may be programmed to function as toggle, scene or dimmer
6.   24V operating power
7.   Two RJ-45 ports for connection to CAT5 cabling.
8.   Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld configuration tool and control by remote personal controls.
9.   All digital parameter data programmed into an individual wall switch sensor shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the sensor-switch. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.
2.6   DIGITAL WALL SWITCHES
A.   Digital wall switch features include the following:
1.   Momentary pushbuttons available in multi-button, single-gang configurations.
2.   Pushbuttons with LED light indicating power and load status
3.   Pushbuttons may be programmed to function as toggle, scene or dimmer
4.   24V operating power
5.   Two RJ-45 ports for CAT5 cabling connection
6.   Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with handheld programmer
7.   Removable field replaceable buttons
8.   Engraved and alternate finishes available
9.   All digital parameter data programmed into an individual wall switch shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the switch. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.
2.7   DIGITAL PHOTOSENSORS
A.   Digital photosensors shall include the following features:
1.   Automatic switching, bi-level, tri-level or dimming capabilities
2.   Closed or Open Loop control mode available
3.   Unit's internal photodiode shall only measure lightwaves within the visible spectrum. The photodiode's spectral response curve shall closely match the entire photopic curve. Photodiode shall not measure energy in either the ultraviolet or infrared spectrums. Photocell shall have a sensitivity of less than 5 percent for any wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or greater than 700 nanometers.
4.   Light level range shall be from 1-6,553 foot-candles (fc).
5.   Selectable deadband separation between the "ON Setpoint" and the "OFF Setpoint" that prevents lights from cycling.
6.   Photosensors shall have a digital, independently configurable fade rate for both increasing and decreasing light level in units of percent per second.
7.   Photosensors shall provide adjustable cut-off time. Cut-off time is defined by the number of selected minutes the load is at the minimum output before the load turns off. Selectable range between 0-240 minutes including option to never cut-off.
8.   Integral infrared (IR) transceiver for programming with handheld configuration tool
9.   LED status light indicates test mode, override mode and load binding.
10.   Override switch on device to turn controlled load(s) ON and OFF.
11.   24V operating power
12.   One RJ-45 port for CAT5 cabling connection.
13.   All digital parameter data programmed into a photosensor shall be retained in non-

volatile FLASH memory within the photosensor. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.
2.8   DIGITAL TIMECLOCK
A.   Digital timeclock shall include the following features:
1.   Enclosure shall be NEMA 1, sized to fit interior componentry and configured for surface wall mounting with screw cover.
2.   Interior assembly shall include factory assembled components specifically designed and listed for the application.
3.   Power supply shall be a multi-voltage transformer assembly with rated power to supply all electronics. Power supply to have internal over-current protection with automatic reset and metal oxide varistor protection.
4.   99 groups and 254 independent schedule events
5.   Astronomic capability, blink warning, daylight savings, and holiday functions
6.   On/Off or Normal Hours/After Hours operation
7.   Non-volatile memory with programming retained for a minimum of 10 years.
2.9   HANDHELD PROGRAMMER
A.   Handheld Programmer shall include the following features:
1.   Two-way infrared (IR) communication with digital IR-enabled devices within 30ft range
2.   High visibility LED display and pushbutton user interface with menu-driven operation.
3.   Read, modify parameters for devices
4.   Identify devices and corresponding serial numbers PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1   PREPARATION
A.   Do not begin installation until measurements have been verified and work areas have been properly prepared.
B.   If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
C.   Verify that required pre-installation meeting specified in Part 1 of this specification has been completed, recorded meeting minutes have been distributed and all outstanding issues noted have been resolved prior to the start of installation.
3.2   EXAMINATION
A.   Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
B.   Examine walls and ceilings for suitable conditions where lighting control devices will be installed.
C.   Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3   INSTALLATION

A.   Comply with NECA 1.
B.   Install system in accordance with the approved system shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
C.   Test all devices to ensure proper communication.
D.   Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity in accordance with energy code requirements and for proper detection of occupants and energy savings.
E.   Tighten all panel Class I conductors from both circuit breaker and to loads to torque ratings as marked on enclosure UL label.
F.   All Class II cabling shall enter enclosures from within low-voltage wiring areas and shall remain within those areas. No Class I conductors shall enter a low-voltage area.
G.   Run separate neutrals for any phase dimmed branch load circuit. Different types of dimming loads shall have separate neutral.
H.   Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-borne vibration unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory- installed vibration isolators.
I.   Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted sensor devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies
J.   Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4   WIRING INSTALLATION
A.   Comply with NECA 1.
B.   Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.
C.   Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower- limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
D.   Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.
E.   Splice, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.5   IDENTIFICATION
A.   Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems.”
1.   Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
2.   Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.

B.   Label time switches and contactors with unique designation.
3.6   LIGHTING CONTROL SEQUENCE
A.   Generally, sequences for these digital lighting controls is as follows. Notes or specific sequences defined on drawings shall be used if specified. Where spaces are defined as analog controls do not utilize sequences in this section.
1.   Lobbies and public gathering spaces, provide dimming and (and scene control as defined by building program.
a.   Unless otherwise specified daytime light levels 100%, night light levels 50%. Upon detection of occupancy maintain 100% light levels for 15 minutes during overnight hours.
2.   Hallways and stairwells; unless otherwise specified daytime light levels 100%, night light levels 50%. Upon detection of occupancy maintain 100% light levels for 15 minutes during overnight hours
B.   The outdoor lighting for sidewalks, parking lots and street shall be controlled via central photocell to turn the lights on; do not place photo cell in an area that is shaded during occupied hours. Provide a “Hand-Off-Auto” (HOA) switch to operate the lights manually. The HOA switch shall be mounted in an area not accessible to the general public.
3.7   ADJUSTING
A.   Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting lighting control devices to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
1.   For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.
2.   For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's operations.
3.   Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.
3.8   FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.   Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting control devices and perform tests and inspections.
B.   Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections.
C.   Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:
1.   Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation
2.   Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.   See Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.
D.   The selection, location and number of occupancy sensors will be such that the coverage

range for minor motion detection by the least effective of the two technologies will not be exceeded, where minor motion coverage is typical for sedentary occupants
1.   Where more than one sensor is required to provide full coverage of the space area, then the number of sensors will be such that the minor motion coverage range of individual sensors will overlap in the areas between sensors
2.   Occupancy sensors shall be installed according to manufacturer’s recommendations for location, obstructions, spacing and the directional sensing, but in general shall be installed:
a.   Ceiling mounted: Directly over the desk or relevant work area, or if in a common work area, then in the center of the rooms.
b.   Wall mounted: in a straight-on, unobstructed direct view of the person at the desk or relevant work area.
3.   If Necessary to prevent false-ons from corridor traffic, blinders or masking shall be installed over the applicable portions of the lens to prevent detection of movement in the adjacent space. Ultrasonic sensor transducers, if directional shall be directed away from corridors and adjacent spaces.
4.   Sensitivity shall be adjusted so that lights come on within one or two steps of a person entering the room.
E.   Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
F.   Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9   DEMONSTRATION
A.   C Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements for low-voltage, programmable lighting control systems specified in Section 260943.16 "Addressable-Luminaire Lighting Controls" and Section 260943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting Controls.”
B.   Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.
3.10   PROGRAMMING AND TRAINING
A.   Before Substantial Completion, arrange for startup of the lighting control system, including the following:
1.   Program system in accordance with design documents Sequence of Operation
2.   Confirm proper operation of system components
3.   Provide owner training of system operation END OF SECTION 260943

SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA:

1. Distribution transformers.
2. Buck-boost transformers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

D. Source quality-control test reports.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor- bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B.   Manufacturers:   Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.   Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2.   General Electric Company.
3.   Square D; Schneider Electric.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
2. Coil Material: Copper.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

E. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Comply with 10 CFR 431 (DOE 2016) efficiency levels.
2. Marked as compliant with DOE 2016 efficiency levels by an NRTL.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Cores: One leg per phase.

C. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

D. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated, NEMA 250, Type 3R.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: Gray.

F. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None.

G. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity.

H. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity

I. Insulation Class, Smaller Than 30 kVA: 180 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

J. Insulation Class 300 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

K. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor.

1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-factor.
2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.

3. Unit shall comply with requirements of DOE 2016 efficiency levels when tested according to NEMA TP 2 with a K-factor equal to one.

L. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.

1.   Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals.
2.   Include special terminal for grounding the shield.
3.   Shield Effectiveness:

a.   Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings:   Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.
b.   Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz.
c.   Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz.

M. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

N. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core.

O. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.

2.4 BUCK-BOOST TRANSFORMERS

A. Description: Self-cooled, two-winding dry type, rated for continuous duty and with wiring terminals suitable for connection as autotransformer. Transformers shall comply with NEMA ST 1 and shall be listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561.

B. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.

1. Finish Color: Gray.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1       EXAMINATION
   A.   Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.
   B.   Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
   C.   Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.
   D.   Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.
   E.   Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2
INSTALLATION
   A.   Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.
   B.   Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3
CONNECTIONS
   A.   Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
   B.   Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
   C.   Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
   D.   Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.

3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

D. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections.

1.   Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
2.   Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11 months after Substantial Completion.
3.   Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include infrared thermogram. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.
4.   Infrared scan must be performed with sufficient covers removed to clearly expose electrical connections.

E. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.

C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

END OF SECTION 262200

SECTION 262300 - LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal-enclosed, low-voltage power circuit-breaker switchgear rated 1000 V and less for use in ac systems.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing communication and metering requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Service.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switchgear, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment.

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the following:

a.   Tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings.
b.   Enclosure types and details.
c.   Outline and general arrangement drawing showing dimensions, shipping sections, and weights of each assembled section.
d.   Bus configuration with size and number of conductors in each bus run, including phase, neutral, and ground conductors of main and branch buses.
e.   Current rating of buses.
f.   Short-time and short-circuit current rating of switchgear assembly.
g.   Nameplate legends.

h.   Mimic-bus diagram.
i.   Utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.
j.   UL listing for series rating of installed devices.
k.   Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around switchgear where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show switchgear layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

D. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish. Manufacturer's color charts showing colors available for mimic bus.

E. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final switchgear load connections have been made, for record.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

B. Source Limitations: Obtain switchgear through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of switchgear and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver switchgear in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Store switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchgear to provide protection from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchgear; install electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent condensation.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace building components and structures to provide pathway for moving switchgear into place.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than 10 working days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manger’s written permission.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchgear, including clearances between switchgear, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1.   Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F.
2.   Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
3.   Exposure to fume, vapors, or dust.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required clearances for workspace and equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1.   Fuses: Six of each type and rating used. Include spares for potential transformer fuses, control power fuses, and fuses and fusible devices for fused circuit breakers.
2.   Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.
3.   Touchup Paint: 3 containers of paint matching enclosure finish each 0.5 pint (250 mL).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.   ABB Inc.
2.   Cutler-Hammer, Inc.; Eaton Corporation.
3.   General Electric Company.
4.   Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
5.   Square D; Schneider Electric.

2.2 RATINGS

A. Nominal System Voltage: 480/277 V, 4; 208/120 V, 4 or as specified on electrical drawings wire, 60 Hz.

B. Main-Bus Continuous: 4000, 3200, 2000, 1600 or as specified on electrical drawings A.

C. Short-Time and Short-Circuit Current: Match rating of highest-rated circuit breaker in switchgear assembly.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Factory assembled and tested and complying with IEEE C37.20.1.

B. Indoor Enclosure Material: Steel.

C. Outdoor Enclosure Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Outdoor Enclosure Fabrication Requirements: Weatherproof; integral structural-steel base frame with factory-applied asphaltic undercoating; and each compartment equipped with the following features:

1.   Structural design and anchorage adequate to resist loads imposed by 125-mph (200-km/h wind.
2.   Space heater operating at one-half or less of rated voltage, sized to prevent condensation.
3.   Louvers equipped with insect and rodent screen and filter; arranged to permit air circulation while excluding insects, rodents, and exterior dust.
4.   Hinged front door with padlocking provisions.
5.   Interior light with switch.
6.   Weatherproof duplex receptacle.
7.   Common internal aisle of sufficient width to permit protective-device withdrawal, disassembly, and servicing in aisle.
8.   Aisle access doors with outside padlocking provisions and interior panic latches.
9.   Aisle space heaters operating at one-half or less of rated voltage thermostatically controlled.
10.   Vaporproof fluorescent aisle lights with low-temperature ballasts, controlled by wall switch at each entrance.
11.   GFCI duplex receptacles, a minimum of two, located in aisle.
12.   Aisle ventilation louvers equipped with insect and rodent screen and filter and arranged to permit air circulation while excluding insects, rodents, and exterior dust.

E. Finish: IEEE C37.20.1, manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on phosphatizing-treated metal surfaces.

F. Section barriers between main and tie circuit-breaker compartments shall be extended to rear of section.

G. Bus isolation barriers shall be arranged to isolate line bus from load bus at each main and tie circuit breaker.

H. Circuit-breaker compartments shall be equipped to house drawout-type circuit breakers and shall be fitted with hinged outer doors.

I. Fabricate enclosure with removable, hinged, rear cover panels to allow access to rear interior of switchgear.

J. Auxiliary Compartments: Match and align with basic switchgear assembly. Include the following:

1. Utility metering compartment that complies with utility company requirements.

2.   Bus transition sections.
3.   Incoming-line pull sections.
4.   Hinged front panels for access to metering, accessory, and blank compartments.
5.   Pull box on top of switchgear for extra room for pulling cable, with removable top, front, and side covers and ventilation provisions adequate to maintain air temperature in pull box within same limits as switchgear.

a.   Set pull box back from front to clear circuit-breaker lifting mechanism.
b.   Bottom: Insulating, fire-resistant material with separate holes for cable drops into switchgear.
c.   Cable Supports:   Arranged to ease cabling and adequate to support cables indicated, including those for future installation.

K. Bus bars connect between vertical sections and between compartments. Cable connections are not permitted.

1.   Main Phase Bus: Uniform capacity the entire length of assembly.
2.   Neutral Bus: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity, except as indicated. Equip bus with pressure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral conductors. Include braces for neutral-bus extensions for bus way feeders.
3.   Vertical Section Bus Size: Comply with IEEE C37.20.1, including allowance for spare circuit breakers and spaces for future circuit breakers.
4.   Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.
5.   Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Silver- or tin-plated, high-strength, electrical-grade aluminum alloy, with copper or tin-plated aluminum circuit-breaker line connections.
6.   Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity or tin-plated, high-strength, electrical-grade aluminum alloy.
7.   Use silver-plated copper or tin-plated aluminum for connecting circuit-breaker line to aluminum bus.
8.   Use copper for connecting circuit-breaker line to copper bus.
9.   Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated.
10.   Feeder Circuit-Breaker Load Terminals: Silver-plated copper bus extensions equipped with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit conductors.
11.   Ground Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with pressure connector for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors, minimum size 1/4 by 2 inches.
12.   Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-circuit currents.
13.   Neutral bus equipped with pressure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral conductors. Neutral-bus extensions for bus way feeders are braced.
14.   Neutral Disconnect Link: Bolted, uninsulated, 1/4-by-2-inch copper bus, arranged to connect neutral bus to ground bus.
15.   Provide for future extensions from either end of main phase, neutral, and ground bus by means of predrilled bolt-holes and connecting links.
16.   Bus-Bar Insulation: Individual bus bars wrapped with factory-applied, flame-retardant tape or spray-applied, flame-retardant insulation.

a. Sprayed Insulation Thickness: 3 mils, minimum.
b. Bolted Bus Joints: Insulate with secure joint covers that can easily be removed and reinstalled.

2.4 COMPONENTS

A. Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.

1. Potential Transformers: Secondary-voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of
0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.
2. Current Transformers: Ratios as indicated; burden and accuracy class suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments.

B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: UL-listed or -recognized, microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:

1. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondary’s, and potential terminals rated to 600 V.
2. Switch-selectable digital display of the following:

a.   Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
b.   Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
c.   Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
d.   Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
e.   Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
f.   Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
g.   Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
h.   Integrated Demand, with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Minutes: Plus or minus 2 percent.
i.   Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent; stored values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.

3. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door.

C. Analog Instruments: Rectangular, 4-1/2-inch square, accurate within 1 percent, semiflush mounting, with antiparallax 250-degree scale and external zero adjustment, complying with ANSI C39.1.

1.   Voltmeters: Cover an expanded scale range of normal voltage plus 10 percent.
2.   Voltmeter Selector Switch: Rotary type with off position to provide readings of phase- to-phase and phase-to-neutral voltages.
3.   Ammeters: Cover an expanded scale range of bus rating plus 10 percent.
4.   Ammeter Selector Switch: Permits current reading in each phase and keeps current- transformer secondary circuits closed in off position.
5.   Locate meter and selector switch on circuit-breaker compartment door for indicated feeder circuits only.
6.   Watt-Hour Meters: Flush- or semiflush-mounting type, 5 A, 120 V, 3 phase, 3 wire; with 3 elements, 15-minute indicating demand register, and provision for testing and adding pulse initiation.
7.   Recording Demand Meter: Usable as totalizing relay or indicating and recording maximum demand meter with 15-minute interval.

a. Operation: Meter counts and records a succession of pulses entering two channels.

b. Housing: Drawout, back-connected case arranged for semiflush mounting.

D. Relays: Comply with IEEE C37.90, types and settings as indicated; with test blocks and plugs.

E. Surge Arresters: Distribution class, metal-oxide-varistor type. Comply with IEEE C62.11 and NEMA LA 1.

1. Install in cable termination compartments and connect in each phase of circuit.
2. Coordinate rating with circuit voltage.

F. Provision for Future Devices: Equip compartments with rails, mounting brackets, supports, necessary appurtenances, and bus connections.

G. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for switchgear interior, including instruments and instrument transformers.

H. Control Power Supply: Control power transformer supplying 120-V control circuits through secondary disconnect devices. Include the following features:

1. Dry-type transformers, in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA, including primary and secondary fuses.
2. Two control power transformers in separate compartments with necessary interlocking relays; each transformer connected to line side of associated main circuit breaker.

a. Secondary windings connected through a relay or relays to control bus to affect an automatic transfer scheme.
b. Secondary windings connected through an internal automatic transfer switch to switchgear control power bus.

3. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses with current-limiting and overload protection.
4. Fuses are specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

I. Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and complying with the following:

1. Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
2. Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for duty required.

2.5 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Description: Comply with IEEE C37.13.

B. Ratings: As indicated for continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings for each circuit breaker; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear.

C. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating mechanism with the following features:

1.   Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator.
2.   Slow Closing Speed: Optional with operator for inspection and adjustment.
3.   Stored-Energy Mechanism: Electrically charged, with optional manual charging
4.   Operation counter.

D. Trip Devices: Solid-state, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two current transformers or sensors per phase, a release mechanism, and the following features:

1.   Functions:   Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions, independent of each other in both action and adjustment.
2.   Temperature Compensation: Ensures accuracy and calibration stability from minus 5 to plus 104 deg F.
3.   Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics.
4.   Current Adjustability: Dial settings and rating plugs on trip units or sensors on circuit breakers, or a combination of these methods.
5.   Three bands, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-delay functions; marked "minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum."
6.   Pickup Points: Five minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. Equip short- time-trip function for switchable I2t operation.
7.   Pickup Points: Five minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions.
8.   Ground-fault protection with at least three short-time-delay settings and three trip-time- delay bands; adjustable current pickup. Arrange to provide protection for the following:

a.   Three-wire circuit or system.
b.   Four-wire circuit or system.
c.   Four-wire, double-ended substation.

9. Trip Indication: Labeled, battery-powered lights or mechanical targets on trip device to indicate type of fault.

E. Auxiliary Contacts: For interlocking or remote indication of circuit-breaker position, with spare auxiliary switches and other auxiliary switches required for normal circuit-breaker operation, quantity as indicated. Each consists of two Types "a" and two Types "b" stages (contacts) wired through secondary disconnect devices to a terminal block in stationary housing.

F. Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking mechanism to position circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in connected, test, and disconnected positions. Include the following features:

1. Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position when it is closed, and prevent closure of circuit breaker unless it is in connected, test, or disconnected position.
2. Circuit-Breaker Positioning: An open circuit breaker may be racked to or from connected, test, and disconnected positions only with the associated compartment door closed unless live parts are covered by a full dead-front shield. An open circuit breaker may be manually withdrawn to a position for removal from the structure with the door open. Status for connection devices for different positions includes the following:

a. Test Position: Primary disconnect devices disengaged, and secondary disconnect devices and ground contact engaged.

b. Disconnected Position: Primary and secondary devices and ground contact disengaged.

G. Arc Chutes: Readily removable from associated circuit breaker when it is in disconnected position, and arranged to permit inspection of contacts without removing circuit breaker from switchgear.

H. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each circuit breaker to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism.

I. Operating Handle: One for each circuit breaker capable of manual operation.

J. Electric Close Button: One for each electrically operated circuit breaker.

K. Mechanical Interlocking of Circuit Breakers: Uses a mechanical tripping lever or equivalent design and electrical interlocks.

L. Key Interlocks: Arranged so keys are attached at devices indicated. Mountings and hardware are included where future installation of key-interlock devices is indicated.

M. Undervoltage Trip Devices: Instantaneous, with adjustable pickup voltage.

N. Undervoltage Trip Devices: Adjustable time-delay and pickup voltage.

O. Shunt-Trip Devices: Where indicated.

P. Fused Circuit Breakers: Circuit breaker and fuse combinations complying with requirements for circuit breakers and trip devices and with the following:

1.   Fuses: NEMA FU 1, Class L current limiting, sized to coordinate with and protect associated circuit breaker.
2.   Circuit Breakers with Frame Size 1600 A and Smaller: Fuses on line side of associated circuit breaker, on a common drawout mounting, arranged so fuses are accessible only when circuit breaker is in disconnected position.
3.   Circuit Breakers with Frame Sizes More Than 1600 A: Fuses and circuit breakers may be installed in separate compartments on separate drawout mountings. Fuse drawout element is interlocked with associated power circuit breaker to prevent drawing out fuse element unless circuit breaker is in open position.
4.   Open-Fuse Trip Device: Positive means of tripping and holding circuit breaker in open position when a fuse opens. Open-fuse status is indicated at front of circuit breaker or fuse drawout element.

Q. Indicating Lights: To indicate circuit breaker is open or closed, for main and bus tie circuit breakers interlocked either with each other or with external devices.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Accessory Set: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for circuit-breaker and switchgear test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

1.   Racking handle to manually move circuit breaker between connected and disconnected positions.
2.   Portable test set for testing all functions of circuit-breaker, solid-state trip devices without removal from switchgear.
3.   Relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchgear meters and switchgear class relays.

B. Circuit-Breaker Removal Apparatus: Portable, floor-supported, roller-base, elevating carriage arranged for moving circuit breakers in and out of compartments.

C. Circuit-Breaker Removal Apparatus: Overhead-circuit-breaker lifting device, track mounted at top front of switchgear and complete with hoist and lifting yokes matching each size of drawout circuit breaker installed.

D. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Identified and compartmented steel box or cabinet with lockable door.

E. Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of maintenance manual.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus, arranged in single-line diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with approved mimic-bus diagram.

1.   Mimic-bus segments coordinated with devices in switchgear sections to which applied, to produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchgear components and connections.
2.   Medium: Painted graphics, as selected by Architect.
3.   Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background; as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution components, and major loads. Include as-built data for low-voltage power switchgear and connections as follows:

1.   Frame size of each circuit breaker.
2.   Trip rating for each circuit breaker.
3.   Conduit and wire size for each feeder.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces where switchgear will be installed for compliance with installation tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 400.

B. Anchor switchgear assembly to 4-inch, channel-iron floor sill embedded in concrete base and attach by bolting.

1. Sills: Select to suit switchgear; level and grout flush into concrete base.
2. Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 3 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switchgear unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Diagram and Instructions:

1. Frame and mount under clear acrylic plastic on the front of switchgear.

a. Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including control and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.
b. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution components, and major loads.

2. Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of maintenance manual.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each switchgear bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following:

1.   Inspect switchgear installation, including wiring, components, connections, and equipment Test and adjust components and equipment.
2.   Verify that electrical control wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal by means of point-to-point continuity testing. Verify that wiring installation complies with requirements in Division 26 Sections “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”.
3.   Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
4.   Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of equipment and components
5.   Report results in writing.

C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of the following NETA categories:

a.   Switchgear.
b.   Circuit breakers.
c.   Protective relays.
d.   Instrument transformers.
e.   Metering and instrumentation.
f.   Ground-fault systems.
g.   Battery systems.
h.   Surge arresters.
i.   Capacitors.

2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchgear. Remove front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1.   Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switchgear 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2.   Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
3.   Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics according to results in Division 26 Section "Short-Circuit Studies” and “Coordination Studies."

B. Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics.

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to switchgear, according to manufacturer's written instructions, throughout periods when switchgear environment is not controlled for temperature and humidity within manufacturers stipulated service conditions.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear. Refer to Division 01 Section "Contract Close Out."

END OF SECTION 262300

SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2
SUMMARY
   A.   Section Includes:
       1.   Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.
2.   Transient voltage suppression devices.
3.   Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
4.   Instrumentation.
5.   Control power.
6.   Accessory components and features.
7.   Identification.
8.   Mimic bus.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1.   Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2.   Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3.   Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4.   Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5.   Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation and isolation.
6.   Detail utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.
7.   Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

8.   Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
9.   Include diagram and details of proposed mimic bus.
10.   Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified material and finish, for color selection.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

E. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1.   Test procedures used.
2.   Test results that comply with requirements.
3.   Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1.   Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.
2.   Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
3.   Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Comply with NEMA PB 2.

G. Comply with NFPA 70.

H. Comply with NFPA 70E.

I. Comply with UL 891.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards and install temporary electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent condensation.

C. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.

B. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F.

C. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

D. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1.   Notify Construction Manager no fewer than 14 days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.
2.   Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
3.   Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's written permission.
4.   Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor- bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1.   Potential Transformer Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.
2.   Control-Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.
3.   Fuses and Fusible Devices for Fused Circuit Breakers: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
4.   Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
5.   Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
6.   Indicating Lights: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than one of each size and type.

B. Furnish secondary injection test unit capable of testing each type of circuit breaker installed in the switchboard assembly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1.   Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.   General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.   Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:

1.   Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted.
2.   Branch Devices: Panel mounted.
3.   Sections front and rear aligned.

D. Front- and Side-Accessible Switchboards:

1.   Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted.
2.   Branch Devices: Panel mounted.
3.   Sections front and rear aligned.

E. Front- and Rear-Accessible Switchboards:

1.   Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted.
2.   Branch Devices: Panel and fixed, individually mounted.
3.   Sections rear aligned.

F. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V, 208Y/120 V.

G. Main-Bus Continuous: 5000, 4000, 3000, 2500, 2000, 1600, 1200 A.

H. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.

I. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

J. Outdoor Enclosures: Type 3R.

1.   Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard color; undersurfaces treated with corrosion-resistant undercoating.
2.   Enclosure: Downward, rearward sloping roof; rear hinged doors for each section, with provisions for padlocking.
3.   Doors:   Personnel door at each end of aisle, minimum width of 30 inches; opening outwards; with panic hardware and provisions for padlocking.

4. Accessories: Fluorescent lighting fixtures, ceiling mounted; wired to a three-way light switch at each end of aisle; ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) duplex receptacle; emergency battery pack lighting fixture installed on wall of aisle midway between personnel doors.
5. Walk-in Aisle Heating and Ventilating:

a.   Factory-installed electric unit heater(s), wall or ceiling mounted, with integral thermostat and disconnect and with capacities to maintain switchboard interior temperature of 40 deg F with outside design temperature of 104 deg F.
b.   Factory-installed exhaust fan with capacities to maintain switchboard interior temperature of 100 deg F with outside design temperature of 23 deg F.
c.   Ventilating openings complete with replaceable fiberglass air filters.
d.   Thermostat: Single stage; wired to control heat and exhaust fan.

6. Power for Space Heaters, Ventilation, Lighting, and Receptacle: Include a control-power transformer within the switchboard. Supply voltage shall be 120, 120/240, 120/208-V ac.

7. Free standing outdoor switchboards shall be provided with space heaters in each section to maintain temperature and minimum moisture and humidity conditions inside equipment enclosure. The space heater shall be alloy sheathed tubular element. Grade A highest quality nickel chromium resistance wire with perforated steel plate.

K. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.

L. Insulation and isolation for main bus of main section and main and vertical buses of feeder sections.

M. Cubical Space Heaters: Factory-installed electric space heaters of sufficient wattage in each vertical section to maintain enclosure temperature above expected dew point.

1. Space-Heater Control: Thermostats to maintain temperature of each section above expected dew point.
2. Space-Heater Power Source: Transformer, factory installed in switchboard.

N. Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated, barrier compartment and section complying with utility company's requirements; hinged sealed door; buses provisioned for mounting utility company's current transformers and potential transformers or potential taps as required by utility company. If separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with basic switchboard. Provide service entrance label and necessary applicable service entrance features.

O. Customer Metering Compartment: Customer metering with current transformers for each meter. Current transformer secondary wiring shall be terminated on shorting-type terminal blocks. Include potential transformers having primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means and secondary wiring terminated on terminal blocks.

P. Removable, Hinged Rear Doors and Compartment Covers: Secured by captive thumb screws, for access to rear interior of switchboard.

Q. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments.

R. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.

1.   Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver- plated, with tin-plated aluminum or copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.
2.   Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material as through buses, equipped with compression connectors for outgoing circuit conductors. Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at full-ampere rating of circuit- breaker position.
3.   Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with compression connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.
4.   Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.
5.   Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with compression connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.
6.   Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness.

S. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.

T. Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C.

U. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components including instruments and instrument transformers.

2.2 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1.   Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.   General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.   Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired-in, solid-state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:

1.   Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
2.   Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
3.   Integral disconnect switch.
4.   Redundant suppression circuits.
5.   Redundant replaceable modules.
6.   Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.
7.   LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
8.   Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
9.   Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.
10.   Four-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.

D. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per mode/320 kA per phase.

E. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.

F. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277, 208Y/120 -V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1.   Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120.
2.   Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120.
3.   Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120.

G. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits with high leg shall be as follows:

1.   Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.
2.   Line to Ground: 400 V.
3.   Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

H. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240-, 480-, or 600-V, three-phase, three-wire, delta circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V, 1000 V for 240 V.
2. Line to Ground: 1500 V for 480 V, 800 V for 240 V.

2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field- replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a.   Instantaneous trip.
b.   Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c.   Long- and short-time time adjustments.

d.   Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
2.   Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).
3.   Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a.   Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b.   Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
c.   Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
d.   Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking short time delay and ground-fault protection function.
e.   Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted, Universal-mounted, Integral, or Din-rail-mounted communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
f.   Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55percent of rated voltage.
g.   Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch or Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.
h.   Where indicted provide arc-flash maintenance switch:
1)   Provide a manual switch on the compartment door to switch the circuit- breaker short-time tripping characteristics to instantaneous with minimum pickup setting, to reduce the danger from potential arc-flash at downstream equipment.
2)   Provide a lock feature for the switch so that it may be locked in either the off or on maintenance-mode position.
3)   Provide a blue LED indicating light to indicate that the switch is in maintenance mode.
4)   Provide dry relay contacts on each switch for annunciation of the switch position

B. Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker (ICCB): 80 percent rated, sealed, insulated-case power circuit breaker with interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current.

1.   Drawout circuit-breaker mounting.
2.   Two-step, stored-energy closing.
3.   Full-function, microprocessor-based trip units with interchangeable rating plug, trip indicators, and the following field-adjustable settings:

a.   Instantaneous trip.
b.   Long- and short-time time adjustments.
c.   Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground- fault protection function.
5. Remote trip indication and control.

6.   Communication Capability: Integral communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
7.   Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
8.   Control Voltage: 120-V ac.

C. Bolted-Pressure Contact Switch: Bolted-pressure switches shall not be allowed.

D. High-Pressure, Butt-Type Contact Switch: Not allowed.

E. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.

F. Fuses are specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

2.4 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:

1.   Potential Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz, single secondary; disconnecting type with integral fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.
2.   Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary; wound type; single secondary winding and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.
3.   Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA.
4.   Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground-Fault Current Sensing: Connect secondary wiring to ground overcurrent relays, via shorting terminals, to provide selective tripping of main and tie circuit breaker. Coordinate with feeder circuit-breaker, ground-fault protection.

B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based revenue grade unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:

1. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerances as indicated:

a.   Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
b.   Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
c.   Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
d.   Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent.
e.   Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent.
f.   Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
g.   Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
h.   Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.
i.   Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from five to 60 minutes.

j. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.

2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door.

2.5 CONTROL POWER

A. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control- power transformer.

B. Electrically Interlocked Main and Tie Circuit Breakers: Two control-power transformers in separate compartments, with interlocking relays, connected to the primary side of each control- power transformer at the line side of the associated main circuit breaker. 120-V secondaries connected through automatic transfer relays to ensure a fail-safe automatic transfer scheme.

C. Control-Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.

D. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and switchboard class relays.

C. Portable Circuit-Breaker Lifting Device: Floor-supported, roller-based, elevating carriage arranged for movement of circuit breakers in and out of compartments for present and future circuit breakers.

D. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Suitably identified, wall-mounted, lockable, compartmented steel box or cabinet. Arrange for wall mounting.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Mimic Bus: Entire single-line switchboard bus work, as depicted on factory record drawing, on an engraved laminated-plastic (Gravoply) nameplate.

1. Nameplate: At least 0.0625-inch thick laminated plastic (Gravoply), located at eye level on front cover of the switchboard incoming service section.

B. Mimic Bus: Continuously integrated mimic bus factory applied to front of switchboard. Arrange in single-line diagram format, using symbols and letter designations consistent with final mimic-bus diagram.

C. Coordinate mimic-bus segments with devices in switchboard sections to which they are applied. Produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchboard components and connections.

D. Presentation Media: Painted graphics in color contrasting with background color to represent bus and components, complete with lettered designations.

E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.   Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
2.   For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3.   Place and secure anchorage devices.   Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4.   Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

D. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.

F. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instrumentation.

1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. Install spare-fuse cabinet.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for terminating feeder bus specified in Division 26 Sections “Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” & “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”. Drawings indicate general arrangement of bus, fittings, and specialties.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Label each switchboard section with arc flash incident energy labels detailing calculated arc flash levels and protection per DN 26 section.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. Tests and Inspections:

1.   Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2.   Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.   Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a.   Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
b.   Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switchboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
c.   Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. Reports shall include infrared thermograms of inspected items.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Short-Circuit Studies” & “Coordination Studies”

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into service.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based trip, monitoring, and communication units.

END OF SECTION 262413

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1.   Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.   Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2.   Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3.   Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4.   Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5.   Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
6.   Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
7.   Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
8.   Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Panelboard Schedules: Submit final versions after load balancing.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 5 deg F to plus 104 deg F.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1.   Notify Construction Manager no fewer than 14 days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.
2.   Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's written permission.
3.   Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.9 WARRANTY

1. Warranty Period: Fiveyears from date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: Two spares for each panelboard.

3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Flush, Surface, Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a.   Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
b.   Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
c.   Kitchen Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4Xstainless steel.
d.   Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
e.   Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.

2.   Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
3.   Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.
4.   Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
5.   Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
6.   Finishes:

a.   Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
b.   Back Boxes: Galvanized steel, Same finish as panels and trim.
c.   Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components.

7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

B. Incoming Mains Location: Top, Bottom, Convertible between Top and bottom.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1.   Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2.   Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box.
3.   Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box.

4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1.   Material: Tin-plated aluminum, Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2.   Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
3.   Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
4.   Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
5.   Subfeed (Double) Lugs:   Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
6.   Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
7.   Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs:   Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra- capacity neutral bus.

E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1.   Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.   General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.   Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
4.   ABB Ltd.

C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

D. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

E. Mains: Circuit breaker required.
1. Main Lugs may be utilized where a single panel board can be isolated upstream by a breaker; no other panel boards should be affected (i.e. risers).

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt- on circuit breakers.

G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

H. Branch overcurrent protective devices for circuit-breaker frame sizes larger than 250A: solid – state microprocessor based trip units with field adjustable long time pickup, long time delay, short time pickup, short time delay and instantaneous current settings. Each adjustment shall have discrete settings and shall be independent of other adjustments.

I. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.
2. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1.   Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.   General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.   Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
4.   ABB Ltd.

C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

F. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

G. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with multipoint latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. Outer door shall permit full access to the panel interior. Inner door

shall permit access to breaker operating handles and labeling, but current carrying terminals and bus shall remain concealed.

2.4 LOAD CENTERS—NOT ALLOWED

2.5 ELECTRONIC-GRADE PANELBOARDS—specify separately if necessary

A. Buses:

1. Copper phase and neutral buses; 200 percent capacity neutral bus and lugs.
2. Copper equipment and isolated ground buses.

B. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired-in, solid-state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, short-circuit current rating complying with UL 1449, second edition, and matching or exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating, redundant suppression circuits, with individually fused metal-oxide varistors.

1. Accessories:

a.   Fuses rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
b.   Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
c.   Integral disconnect switch.
d.   Redundant suppression circuits.
e.   Redundant replaceable modules.
f.   Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.
g.   LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
h.   Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
i.   Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.
j.   Four-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.

2. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per mode/320 kA per phase.
3. Minimum single-impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform described in IEEE C62.41.2.

a.   Line to Neutral: 70,000 A.
b.   Line to Ground: 70,000 A.
c.   Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.

4. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.
5. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277, 208Y/120, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows:

a. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120.

b. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120.
c. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120.

6. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, single-phase, three-wire circuits shall be as follows:

a.   Line to Neutral: 400 V.
b.   Line to Ground: 400 V.
c.   Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

7. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits with high leg shall be as follows:

a.   Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.
b.   Line to Ground: 400 V.
c.   Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

8. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240-, 480-, or 600-V, three-phase, three-wire, delta circuits shall be as follows:

a. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V, 1000 V for 240 V.
b. Line to Ground: 1500 V for 480 V, 800 V for 240 V.

2.6 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1.   Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.   General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.   Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
4.   ABB Ltd.

C. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1.   Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2.   Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3.   Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field- replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4.   Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5.   GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).
6.   Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers:   Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).
7.   Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240- V, single-pole configuration.
8.   Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a.   Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b.   Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.
c.   Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
d.   Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
e.   Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted, Universal-mounted, Integral, Din-rail-mounted communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
f.   Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage.
g.   Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit- breaker contacts.
h.   Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit breaker trips.
i.   Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
j.   Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking short-time delay and ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices.
k.   Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.
l.   Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.
m.   Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

D. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.

1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."
2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles.

3. Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open and normally closed contact(s) that operate with switch handle operation.

2.7 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following::

B.   Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.   Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.   General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.   Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
4.   ABB Ltd.

C. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, solid-state, parallel- connected, non-modular type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:

1. Accessories:

a.   LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
b.   Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
c.   One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection status.

D. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired-in, bolt-on, solid- state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:

1. Accessories:

2. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per mode/320 kA per phase].
3. Minimum single-impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform described in IEEE C62.41.2.

a.   Line to Neutral: 70,000 A.
b.   Line to Ground: 70,000 A.
c.   Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.

4. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.
5. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277, 208Y/120, 600Y/347-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows:

a.   Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120.
b.   Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120.
c.   Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120.

6. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, single-phase, three-wire circuits shall be as follows:

a.   Line to Neutral: 400 V.
b.   Line to Ground: 400 V.
c.   Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

7. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits with high leg shall be as follows:

a.   Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.
b.   Line to Ground: 400 V.
c.   Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

8. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240-, 480-, or 600-V, three-phase, three-wire, delta circuits shall be as follows:

a. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V, 1000 V for 240 V.
b. Line to Ground: 1500 V for 480 V, 800 V for 240 V.

2.8 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INATION

A. ceive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407, NEMA PB 1.1.

B. mine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. mine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. oceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 TALLATION

A. all panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. ment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness. omply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1.   all dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base.
2.   panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3.   ace and secure anchorage devices.   Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4.   all anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards.
5.   ach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

C. mporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

D. nt top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E. nt panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

F. all overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. all filler plates in unused spaces.

H. four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

I. range conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

J. mply with NECA 1.

3.3 TIFICATION

A. ify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. eate a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. elboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. vice Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

E. el each panelboard with ARC flash incident energy labels detailing calculated ARC flash levels and protection per Div 26 section.

3.4 QUALITY CONTROL

A. sting Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. nufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. rform tests and inspections.

1. nufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. eptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. sts and Inspections:

1. rform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. rrect malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. rform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a.   Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
b.   Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
c.   Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

F. elboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. epare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 USTING

A. st moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Short-Circuit Studies” and “Coordination Studies.”

C. Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1.   asure as directed during period of normal system loading.
2.   rform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.
3.   circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.
4.   lerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.6 TECTION

A. mporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Existing electrical system short circuit calculation and coordination study report shall be taken into consideration while installing new panelboards.

2. The arc-flash hazard boundary (AFHB) and personal protective equipment (PPE) label shall be provided for all energized electrical equipment above 50V.

END OF SECTION 262416

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1.   Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
2.   Twist-locking receptacles.
3.   Receptacles with integral surge suppression units.
4.   Wall-box Dimmers
5.   Switchbox Mounted Occupancy Sensors
6.   Emergency Shunt Relay
7.   Isolated-ground receptacles.
8.   Hospital-grade receptacles.
9.   Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
10.   Solid-state fan speed controls.
11.   Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.
12.   Communications outlets.
13.   Pendant cord-connector devices.
14.   Cord and plug sets.
15.   Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1.   Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2.   Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3.   Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4.   Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
5.   General Electric Company.

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a.   Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).
b.   Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).
c.   Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
d.   Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).
e.   General Electric Company; 5X62.

B. Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498 Supplement SD.

a.   Cooper; 8300 (duplex).
b.   Hubbell; HBL8310 (single), HBL8300H (duplex).
c.   Leviton; 8310 (single), 8300 (duplex).
d.   Pass & Seymour; 9301-HG (single), 9300-HG (duplex).
e.   General Electric Company.

C. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

a.   Hubbell; CR 5253IG.
b.   Leviton; 5362-IG.
c.   Pass & Seymour; IG6300.
d.   General Electric Company.

3. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

D. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a.   Cooper; TR8300.
b.   Hubbell; HBL8300SG.
c.   Leviton; 8300-SGG.
d.   Pass & Seymour; 63H.
e.   General Electric Company.

3. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article, "Pediatric Locations" Section.

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, feed, non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

a.   Cooper; GF20.
b.   Pass & Seymour; 2084.
c.   General Electric Company.

C. Hospital-Grade, Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with UL 498 Supplement SD.

a.   Cooper; HGF20.
b.   Hubbell; HGF8300.
c.   Leviton; 6898-HG.
d.   Pass & Seymour; 2091-SHG.
e.   General Electric Company.

2.4 TVSS RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 1449, with integral TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.

1. TVSS Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp-level rating of 400 volts and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J, according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45.

2. Active TVSS Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to indicate device is "active" or "no longer in service."

3. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R.

B. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles:

a.   Cooper; IG5362BLS.
b.   Hubbell; IG5362SA.
c.   Leviton; 5380-IG.
d.   General Electric Company.

3. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

C. Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles: Comply with UL 498 Supplement SD.

a.   Cooper; 8300BLS.
b.   Hubbell; HBL8362SA.
c.   Leviton; 8380.
d.   General Electric Company.

3. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R.

D. Isolated-Ground, Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles:

a.   Cooper; IG8300HGBLS.
b.   Hubbell; IG8362SA.
c.   Leviton; 8380-IG.
d.   General Electric Company.

3. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R. Comply with UL 498 Supplement SD. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation

from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

2.5 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RECEPTACLES

A. Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with NEMA FB 11 and UL 1010.

a.   Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
b.   EGS/Appleton Electric.
c.   Killark; a division of Hubbell Inc.
d.   General Electric Company.

2.6 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.

a.   Cooper; L520R.
b.   Hubbell; HBL2310.
c.   Leviton; 2310.
d.   Pass & Seymour; L520-R.
e.   General Electric Company.

B. Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

a.   Hubbell; IG2310.
b.   Leviton; 2310-IG.
c.   General Electric Company.

3. Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap.

Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

2.7 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6 configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade.

1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip.
2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.

2.8 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.

1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent.
2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.9 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

a.   Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).
b.   Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way).
c.   Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way).
d.   Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way).

C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a.   Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V.
b.   Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V.
c.   Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V.
d.   Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.

3. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

a.   Cooper; 2221L.
b.   Hubbell; HBL1221L.
c.   Leviton; 1221-2L.
d.   Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

3. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.

a.   Cooper; 1995.
b.   Hubbell; HBL1557.
c.   Leviton; 1257.
d.   Pass & Seymour; 1251.

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

a.   Cooper; 1995L.
b.   Hubbell; HBL1557L.
c.   Leviton; 1257L.
d.   Pass & Seymour; 1251L.

2.10 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.

C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.

1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. Illuminated when "OFF."

D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.

2.11 SWITCBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A.   Manufactures:
1.   Leviton
2.   Lutron
3.   Eaton
4.   Acuity
5.   WattStopper

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor with manual on- off switch, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox using hardwired connection or using wireless connection as noted on drawings.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2. Occupancy Sensor Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn lights off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
3. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F.
4. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA ballast or LED load at 120 V, 1200-VA ballast or LED load at 277 V, and 800-W incandescent.

C. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS1:

1.   Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 2100 sq. ft.
2.   Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic.
3.   Switch Type: SP, manual "on," automatic "off."
4.   Capable of controlling load in three-way application.
5.   Voltage: Match the circuit voltage.

6. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc. The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set point of the sensor.
7. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.
8. Concealed, "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds and 5, 10, and 20 minutes.
9.   Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.
10.   Color: White.
11.   Faceplate: Color matched to switch.

D. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS2:

1.   Standard Range: 210-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft..
2.   Sensing Technology: PIR.
3.   Switch Type: SP, manual "on," automatic "off”.
4.   Capable of controlling load in three-way application.
5.   Voltage: Match the circuit voltage.
6. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc. The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set point of the sensor.
7. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.
8. Concealed, "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds and 5, 10, and 20 minutes.
9.   Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.
10.   Color: White.
11.   Faceplate: Color matched to switch.

2.12 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY

A.   Manufactures:
1.   Leviton
2.   Lutron
3.   Eaton
4.   Acuity
5.   WattStopper

B. Normally closed, electrically held relay, wired in parallel with manual automatic switching contacts, comply with UL 924. Device monitors power to normal lights in an area and provides on/off control of corresponding switched emergency lights. Upon loss of normal power the unit will automatically turn the emergency lighting on until normal power is restored.

1.   120/277V, 20A rating
2.   Push to test button
3.   Auxiliary contact for remote test or fire alarm system interface

2.13 FAN SPEED CONTROLS

A. Modular, 120-V, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters. Comply with UL 1917.

1. Continuously adjustable slider, toggle switch, rotary knob, 5 A .
2. Three-speed adjustable slider, rotary knob, 1.5 A.

2.14 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Wall-Switch Sensors:

a.   Cooper; 6111 for 120 V, 6117 for 277 V.
b.   Hubbell; WS1277.
c.   Leviton; ODS 10-ID.
d.   Pass & Seymour; WS3000.
e.   Watt Stopper (The); WS-200.

3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84 sq. m).

B. Wall-Switch Sensors:

a. Hubbell; AT120 for 120 V, AT277 for 277 V.
b. Leviton; ODS 15-ID.

3. Description: Adaptive-technology type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 20 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84 sq. m).

C. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:

a.   Hubbell; ATP1600WRP.
b.   Leviton; ODWWV-IRW.
c.   Pass & Seymour; WA1001.
d.   Watt Stopper (The); CX-100.

3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 110-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft. (111 sq. m).

D. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:

a.   Hubbell; ATD1600WRP.
b.   Leviton; ODW12-MRW.
c.   Watt Stopper (The); DT-200.

3. Description: Dual technology, with both passive-infrared- and ultrasonic-type sensing, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 110-degree field of view, and a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft. (111 sq. m).

E. Wide-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:

a.   Hubbell; ATP120HBRP.
b.   Leviton; ODWHB-IRW.
c.   Pass & Seymour; HS1001.
d.   Watt Stopper (The); CX-100-3.

3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 150-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft. (111 sq. m).

2.15 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. Submit Manufacturer’s full line of finishes for selection by Architect.

1.   Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2.   Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch thick, satin-finished stainless steel.
3.   Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4.   Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic or cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations."

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R and 4 weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum, thermoplastic with lockable cover.

2.16 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS—Coordinate work with installation of floor finished. Submit Manufacturer’s full line of finishes for selection by Architect.

A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

C. Service Plate: Round, die-cast aluminum with satin finish, unless noted otherwise.

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 Category 5e jacks for UTP cable.

2.17 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.   Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
2.   Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories.
3.   Square D/ Schneider Electric.
4.   Thomas & Betts Corporation.
5.   Wiremold Company (The).

C. Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service outlet assembly.

1.   Service Outlet Assembly: Pedestal type with services indicated or flush type.
2.   Size: Selected to fit nominal 3-inch, 4-inch cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness.
3.   Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly.
4.   Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 4-inch cored openings and reestablish fire rating of floor.
5.   Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors and a minimum of two, 4-pair, Category 5e voice and data communication cables.

2.18 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
2. Wiremold Company (The).

C. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.

D. Raceway Material: Metal, submit Manufacturer’s full line for selection by Architect.

E. Wire: No. 12 AWG.

2.19 SERVICE POLES

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -wired units to extend power and voice and data communication from distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in pole near floor.

1. Poles: Nominal 2.5-inch square cross section, with height adequate to extend from floor to at least 6 inches above ceiling, and with separate channels for power wiring and voice and data communication cabling.
2. Mounting: Ceiling trim flange with concealed bracing arranged for positive connection to ceiling supports; with pole foot and carpet pad attachment.
3. Finishes Satin-anodized aluminum, unless noted otherwise.
4.   Wiring: Sized for minimum of five No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors and a minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 3 or 5 voice and data communication cables.
5.   Power Receptacles: Two duplex, 20-A, heavy-duty, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R units.
6.   Voice and Data Communication Outlets:   Two RJ-45 Category 5e jacks or four RJ-45 Category 5e jacks, as noted on Drawings.

2.20 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. Submit Manufacturer’s full line for selection by Architect.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Black, or as selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.
3. TVSS Devices: Blue.
4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: As specified above, with orange triangle on face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1.   Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.
2.   Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.
3.   Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4.   Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1.   Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.
2.   Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3.   The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.
4.   Existing Conductors:

a.   Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b.   Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c.   Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1.   Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2.   Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.
3.   Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.
4.   Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
5.   When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
6.   Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
7.   When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8.   Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9.   When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left.
2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade at the top.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1.   Install dimmers within terms of their listing.
2.   Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.
3.   Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black, white, red-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1.   In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99.
2.   Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
3.   Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles:   Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1.   Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2.   Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.
3.   Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4.   GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5.   Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6.   The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Test straight blade hospital-grade convenience outlets for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz. (115 g).

END OF SECTION 262726

SECTION 262813 - FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.   Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches.
2.   Plug fuses rated 125-V ac and less for use in plug-fuse-type enclosed switches fuseholders.
3.   Plug-fuse adapters for use in Edison-base, plug-fuse sockets.
4.   Spare-fuse cabinets.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.
b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

2.   Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.
3.   Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
4.   Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves (instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.
5.   Coordination charts and tables and related data.
6.   Selective Coordination fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1.   Ambient temperature adjustment information.
2.   Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
3.   Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves (instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.
4.   Coordination charts and tables and related data.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (5 deg C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1       MANUFACTURERS
   A.   Manufacturers:   Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
       1.   Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
2.   Edison Fuse, Inc.
3.   Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.
4.   Littelfuse, Inc.
5.   Bussmann Div., Cooper Industries

2.2
CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

2.3
PLUG FUSES
A. Characteristics: UL 248-11, nonrenewable plug fuses; 125-V ac.

2.4
PLUG-FUSE ADAPTERS
A. Characteristics: Adapters for using Type S, rejection-base plug fuses in Edison-base
fuseholders or sockets; ampere ratings matching fuse ratings; irremovable once installed.

2.5 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key- coded cam lock and pull.

1.   Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 10 percent, but no fewer than 3 of each size and type spare capacity minimum.
2.   Finish: Gray, baked enamel.
3.   Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch high letters on exterior of door.
4.   Fuse Pullers:   For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1       EXAMINATION
   A.   Examine fuses before installation.   Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.
   B.   Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.
   C.   Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
   D.   Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.
   E.   Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2
FUSE APPLICATIONS
   A.   Cartridge Fuses:
       1.   Service Entrance:   Class L, fast acting; Class RK1, fast acting; Class J, fast acting; Class T, fast acting.
2.   Feeders: Class L, fast acting; Class RK1, fast acting; Class RK5, fast acting; Class J, fast acting.
3.   Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1; Class RK5, time delay.
4.   Other Branch Circuits:   Class RK1, time delay; Class RK5, time delay; Class J, time delay.
5.   Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting.
   B.   Plug Fuses:
       1.   Motor Branch Circuits: Edison-base type, dual; Type S, dual-element time delay.
2.   Other Branch Circuits: Edison-base type, dual-element time delay; Type S, dual-element time delay.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

B. Install plug-fuse adapters in Edison-base fuseholders and sockets. Ensure that adapters are irremovable once installed.

C. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.

END OF SECTION 262813

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2
SUMMARY
   A.   Section Includes:
       1.   Fusible switches.
2.   Nonfusible switches.
3.   Receptacle switches.
4.   Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
5.   Molded-case switches.
6.   Enclosures.

1.3
DEFINITIONS
   A.   NC: Normally closed.
   B.   NO: Normally open.
   C.   SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
   D.   Three way switches.
   E.   Single Pole switches.
   F.   Four Way switches.

1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
   A.   Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
       1.   The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1.   Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2.   Current and voltage ratings.
3.   Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
4.   Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
5.   Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
6.   Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

E. Field quality-control reports.

1.   Test procedures used.
2.   Test results that comply with requirements.
3.   Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.

F. Manufacturer's field service report.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.
2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1.   Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no less than one set of each size and type.
2.   Fuse Pullers: three for each size and type.
3.   Provide a set of three spare fuses for each size and voltage of class RK1 and RK5 fuse.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1.   Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.   General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.   Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 and 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 240 and 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240 and 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

F. Accessories:

4.   Class R Fuse Kit:   Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.
5.   Auxiliary Contact Kit:   [Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.
6.   Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.
7.   Lugs:   Mechanical Compression type, suitable for number, size thermal rating, and conductor material.
8.   Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
9.   Accessory Control Power Voltage:   Remote mounted and powered; 24-V ac120-V ac 208-V ac 240-V ac 6-V dc 12-V dc 24-V dc.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1.   Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.   General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.   Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4.   Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 and 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 240 and 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240 and 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

F. Accessories:

1.   Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.
2.   Neutral Kit:   Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3.   Isolated Ground Kit:   Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
4.   Auxiliary Contact Kit: One Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.
5.   Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.
6.   Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, thermal rating and conductor material.
7.   Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 24-V dc.

2.3 RECEPTACLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

C. Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw Fusible Switch: 240 and 600 V ac, 30, 60,100,200,400 A; UL 98 and NEMA KS 1; horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified indicated fuses; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw No fusible Switch: 240 and 600-V ac, 30, 60, 100,200,400 A; UL 98 and NEMA KS 1; horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position.

E. Interlocking Linkage: Provided between the receptacle and switch mechanism to prevent inserting or removing plug while switch is in the on position, inserting any plug other than specified, and turning switch on if an incorrect plug is inserted or correct plug has not been fully inserted into the receptacle.

F. Receptacle: Polarized, three-phase, four-wire receptacle (fourth wire connected to enclosure ground lug).

Receptacle Manufacturer and Catalog Number:

SEE WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262726. END OF SECTION 262816

SECTION 262923 – VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes separately enclosed, pre-assembled, combination VFCs, rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance).

C. CPT: Control power transformer.

D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

E. IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor.

F. LAN: Local area network.

G. LED: Light-emitting diode.

H. MCP: Motor-circuit protector.

I. NC: Normally closed.

J. NO: Normally open.

K. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

L. PCC: Point of common coupling.

M. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

N. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.

O. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

P. TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion.

Q. THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand.

R. VFC: Variable-frequency motor controller.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFC indicated. Include features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, shipping and operating weights, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Harmonic Analysis Study and Report (request waiver for single VFD’s and motors under 10 HP): Comply with IEEE 399 and NETA Acceptance Testing Specification; identify the effects of nonlinear loads and their associated harmonic contributions on the voltages and currents throughout the electrical system. Analyze possible operating scenarios, including recommendations for VFC input filtering to limit TDD and THD(V) at each VFC to specified levels.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For VFCs, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1.   Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
2.   Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3.   Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based, and their installation requirements.

E. Product Certificates: For each VFC, from manufacturer.

F. Source quality-control reports.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1.   Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and MCP trip settings.
2.   Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.
3.   Manufacturer's   written   instructions   for   testing,   adjusting,   and   reprogramming microprocessor control modules.
4.   Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points.

I. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full load without derating, under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1.   Ambient Temperature: Not less than 14 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
2.   Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F
3.   Humidity: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).
4.   Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1.   Notify UMD Project Manager no fewer than 10 days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical systems.
2.   Indicate method of providing temporary electrical service.
3.   Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without UMD Project Manager written permission.
4.   Comply with NFPA 70E.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs, including clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, load characteristics, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
2. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

3. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. The VFD Product Warranty shall be 24 months from the date of certified start-up, not to exceed 30 months from the date of shipment. The warranty shall include all parts, labor, travel time and expenses. A toll free 24/365 technical support line shall be available.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.   ABB (ACH-580 unless otherwise specified).
2.   Danfoss Inc.; Danfoss Drives Div.
3.   JCI AYK series drives.

B. General Requirements for VFCs: Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508C

C. The VFD package as specified herein shall be enclosed in a UL Listed Type enclosure, exceeding NEMA enclosure design criteria (enclosures with only NEMA ratings are not acceptable), completely assembled and tested by the manufacturer in an ISO9001 facility. The VFD tolerated voltage window shall allow the VFD to operate from a line of +30% nominal, and -35% nominal voltage as a minimum.

1. Environmental operating conditions: VFDs shall be capable of continuous opera- tion at 0 to 500 C (32 to 1220 F) ambient temperature as per VFD manufacturers documented/submittal data or VFD must be oversized to meet these temperature requirements. Not acceptable are VFD’s that can only operate at 40 C intermit- tently (average during a 24 hour period) and therefore must be oversized. Altitude 0 to 3300 feet above sea level, less than 95% humidity, non-condensing. All circuit boards shall have conformal coating.
2. Enclosure shall be rated UL Type 1 and shall be UL listed as a plenum rated VFD. VFD’s without these ratings are not acceptable. NEMA only type 1 enclosures are not acceptable (must be UL Type 1).

D. All VFDs shall have the following standard features:

1. All VFDs shall have the same customer interface, including digital display, and keypad, regardless of horsepower rating. The keypad shall be removable, capable of remote mounting and allow for uploading and downloading of parameter set- tings as an aid for start-up of multiple VFDs.
2. The keypad shall include Hand-Off-Auto selections and manual speed control. The drive shall incorporate “bumpless transfer” of speed reference when switching be-

tween “Hand” and “Auto” modes. There shall be fault reset and “Help” buttons on the keypad. The Help button shall include “on-line” assistance for programming and troubleshooting.
3.   There shall be a built-in time clock in the VFD keypad. The clock shall have a bat- tery back up with 10 years minimum life span. The clock shall be used to date and time stamp faults and record operating parameters at the time of fault. If the bat- tery fails, the VFD shall automatically revert to hours of operation since initial power up. Capacitor back-up is not acceptable. The clock shall also be program- mable to control start/stop functions, constant speeds, PID parameter sets and out- put Form-C relays. The VFD shall have a digital input that allows an override to the time clock (when in the off mode) for a programmable time frame. There shall be four (4) separate, independent timer functions that have both weekday and weekend settings.
4.   The VFD’s shall utilize pre-programmed application macro’s specifically designed to facilitate start-up. The Application Macros shall provide one command to re- program all parameters and customer interfaces for a particular application to re- duce programming time. The VFD shall have two user macros to allow the end- user to create and save custom settings.
5.   The VFD shall have cooling fans that are designed for easy replacement. The fans shall be designed for replacement without requiring removing the VFD from the wall or removal of circuit boards. The VFD cooling fans shall operate only when required. To extend the fan and bearing operating life, the VFD shall cycle the cooling fans on and off as required.
6.   The VFD shall be capable of starting into a coasting load (forward or reverse) up to full speed and accelerate or decelerate to set point without tripping or component damage (flying start).
7.   The VFD shall have the ability to automatically restart after an over-current, over- voltage, under-voltage, or loss of input signal protective trip. The number of restart attempts, trial time, and time between attempts shall be programmable.
8.   The overload rating of the drive shall be 110% of its normal duty current rating for 1 minute every 10 minutes, 130% overload for 2 seconds. The minimum FLA rat- ing shall meet or exceed the values in the NEC/UL table 430.250 for 4-pole mo- tors.
9.   The VFD shall have internal 5% impedance reactors to reduce the harmonics to the power line and to add protection from AC line transients. The 5% impedance may be from dual (positive and negative DC bus) reactors, or 5% AC line reactors. VFD’s with only one DC reactor shall add an AC line reactor.
10.   The input current rating of the VFD shall be no more than 3% greater than the out- put current rating. VFD’s with higher input current ratings require the upstream wiring, protection devices, and source transformers to be oversized per NEC
430.120. Input and output current ratings must be shown on the VFD nameplate.
11.   The VFD shall include a coordinated AC transient surge protection system consist- ing of 4-120 joule rated MOV’s (phase to phase and phase to ground), a capacitor clamp, and 5% impedance reactors.
12.   The VFD shall provide a programmable loss-of-load (broken belt / broken cou- pling) Form-C relay output. The drive shall be programmable to signal the loss-of- load condition via a keypad warning, Form-C relay output, and / or over the serial communications bus. The loss-of-load condition sensing algorithm shall include a programmable time delay that will allow for motor acceleration from zero speed without signaling a false loss-of-load condition.

13.   The VFD shall have user programmable underload and overload curve functions to allow user defined indications of broken belt or mechanical failure / jam condition causing motor overload
14.   The VFD shall include multiple “two zone” PID algorithms that allow the VFD to maintain PID control from two separate feedback signals (4-20mA, 0-10V, and / or serial communications). The two zone control PID algorithm will control motor speed based on a minimum, maximum, or average of the two feedback signals.
All of the VFD PID controllers shall include the ability for “two zone” control.
15.   If the input reference (4-20mA or 2-10V) is lost, the VFD shall give the user the option of either (1) stopping and displaying a fault, (2) running at a programmable preset speed, (3) hold the VFD speed based on the last good reference received, or
(4) cause a warning to be issued, as selected by the user. The drive shall be pro- grammable to signal this condition via a keypad warning, Form-C relay output and
/ or over the serial communication bus.
16.   The VFD shall have programmable “Sleep” and “Wake up” functions to allow the drive to be started and stopped from the level of a process feedback signal.

E. All VFDs to have the following adjustments:

1.   Three (3) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from operating the load continuously at an unstable speed. The lockout range must be fully adjustable, from 0 to full speed.
2.   Two (2) PID Set point controllers shall be standard in the drive, allowing pressure or flow signals to be connected to the VFD, using the microprocessor in the VFD for the closed-loop control. The VFD shall have 250 ma of 24 VDC auxiliary power and be capable of loop powering a transmitter supplied by others. The PID set point shall be adjustable from the VFD keypad, analog inputs, or over the communications bus. There shall be two independent parameter sets for the PID controller and the capability to switch between the parameter sets via a digital in- put, serial communications or from the keypad. The independent parameter sets are typically used for night setback, switching between summer and winter set points, etc.
3.   There shall be an independent, second PID loop that can utilize the second analog input and modulate one of the analog outputs to maintain the set point of an inde- pendent process (ie. valves, dampers, etc.). All set points, process variables, etc. to be accessible from the serial communication network.
4.   Two (2) programmable analog inputs shall accept current or voltage signals.
5.   Two (2) programmable analog outputs (0-20ma or 4-20 ma). The outputs may be programmed to output proportional to Frequency, Motor Speed, Output Voltage, Output Current, Motor Torque, Motor Power (kW), DC Bus voltage, Active Refer- ence, Active Feedback, and other data.
6.   Six (6) programmable digital inputs for maximum flexibility in interfacing with ex- ternal devices. All digital inputs shall be programmable to initiate upon an applica- tion or removal of 24VDC or 24VAC.
7.   Three (3) programmable, digital Form-C relay outputs. The relay outputs shall in- clude programmable on and off delay times and adjustable hysteresis. The relays shall be rated for maximum switching current 8 amps at 24 VDC and 0.4 A at 250 VAC; Maximum voltage 300 VDC and 250 VAC; continuous current rating of 2 amps RMS. Outputs shall be true Form-C type contacts; open collector outputs are not acceptable.

8.   Run permissive circuit - There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, input contact closure, time-clock control, or serial communications), the VFD shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal the damper to open (VFD motor does not operate). When the damper is fully open, a normally open dry contact (end-switch) shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to a VFD digital input and allows VFD motor operation. Two separate safety interlock inputs shall be provided. When either safety is opened, the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop and the damper shall be commanded to close. The keypad shall display “start enable 1 (or 2) missing”.
The safety input status shall also be transmitted over the serial communications bus.
9.   The VFD control shall include a programmable time delay for VFD start and a keypad indication that this time delay is active. A Form C relay output provides a contact closure to signal the VAV boxes open. This will allow VAV boxes to be driven open before the motor operates. The time delay shall be field programmable from 0 – 120 seconds. Start delay shall be active regardless of the start command source (keypad command, input contact closure, time-clock control, or serial com- munications), and when switching from drive to bypass.
10.   Seven (7) programmable preset speeds.
11.   Two independently adjustable accel and decel ramps with 1 – 1800 seconds adjust- able time ramps.
12.   The VFD shall include a motor flux optimization circuit that will automatically re- duce applied motor voltage to the motor to optimize energy consumption and re- duce audible motor noise. The VFD shall have selectable software for optimization of motor noise, energy consumption, and motor speed control.
13.   The VFD shall include a carrier frequency control circuit that reduces the carrier frequency based on actual VFD temperature that allows higher carrier frequency settings without derating the VFD.
14.   The VFD shall include password protection against parameter changes.

F.   The Keypad shall include a backlit LCD display. The display shall be in complete English words for programming and fault diagnostics (alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable). All VFD faults shall be displayed in English words. The keypad shall include a minimum of 14 assistants including:
1.   Start-up assistant
2.   Parameter assistants
a.   PID assistant
b.   Reference assistant
c.   I/O assistant
d.   Serial communications assistant
e.   Option module assistant
f.   Panel display assistant
g.   Low noise set-up assistant
3.   Maintenance assistant
4.   Troubleshooting assistant
5.   Drive optimizer assistants

G. All applicable operating values shall be capable of being displayed in engineering (user) units. A minimum of three operating values from the list below shall be capable of being displayed at

all times.   The display shall be in complete English words (alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable):
1.   Output Frequency
2.   Motor Speed (RPM, %, or Engineering units)
3.   Motor Current
4.   Motor Torque
5.   Motor Power (kW)
6.   DC Bus Voltage
7.   Output Voltage

H. The VFD shall include a fireman’s override input. Upon receipt of a contact closure from the fire / smoke control station, the VFD shall operate in one of two modes: 1) Operate at a programmed predetermined fixed speed ranging from -500Hz (reverse) to 500Hz (forward). 2) Operate in a specific fireman’s override PID algorithm that automatically adjusts motor speed based on override set point and feedback. The mode shall override all other inputs (analog/digital, serial communication, and all keypad commands), except customer defined safety run interlocks, and force the motor to run in one of the two modes above. “Override Mode” shall be displayed on the keypad. Upon removal of the override signal, the VFD shall resume normal operation, without the need to cycle the normal digital input run command.

I. Serial Communications

1.   The VFD shall have an EIA-485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall be Modbus, Johnson Controls N2, Siemens Building Technologies FLN, and BACnet. [Optional protocols for LonWorks, Profibus, EtherNet, BACnet IP, and DeviceNet shall be available.] Each individual drive shall have the protocol in the base VFD. The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable. All protocols shall be “certified” by the governing authority (i.e. BTL Listing for BACnet). Use of non-certified protocols is not allowed.
2.   The BACnet connection shall be an EIA-485, MS/TP interface operating at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, or 76.8 Kbps. The connection shall be tested by the BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) and be BTL Listed. The BACnet interface shall conform to the BACnet standard device type of an Applications Specific Controller (B-ASC). The interface shall support all BIBBs defined by the BACnet standard profile for a B-ASC includ- ing, but not limited to:
a.   Data Sharing – Read Property – B.
b.   Data Sharing – Write Property – B.
c.   Device Management – Dynamic Device Binding (Who-Is; I-Am).
d.   Device Management – Dynamic Object Binding (Who-Has; I-Have).
e.   Device Management – Communication Control – B.
3.   If additional hardware is required to obtain the BACnet interface, the VFD manufac- turer shall supply one BACnet gateway per drive. Multiple VFDs sharing one gate- way shall not be acceptable.
4.   Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; run-stop con- trol, speed set adjustment, proportional/integral/derivative PID control adjustments, current limit, accel/decel time adjustments, and lock and unlock the keypad. The drive shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as pro- cess variable feedback, output speed / frequency, current (in amps), % torque, power (kW), kilowatt hours (resettable), operating hours (resettable), and drive temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the VFD relay output status, digital in-

put status, and all analog input and analog output values. All diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote VFD fault reset shall be possible.
5.   Serial communication in bypass shall include, but not be limited to; bypass run-stop control, the ability to force the unit to bypass, and the ability to lock and unlock the keypad. The bypass shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feed- back such as, current (in amps), kilowatt hours (resettable), operating hours (resetta- ble), and bypass logic board temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of monitor- ing the bypass relay output status, and all digital input status. All bypass diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote bypass fault reset shall be possible.
6.   The VFD / bypass shall allow the DDC to control the drive and bypass digital and analog outputs via the serial interface. This control shall be independent of any VFD function. The analog outputs may be used for modulating chilled water valves or cooling tower bypass valves. The drive and bypass’ digital (Form-C relay) outputs may be used to actuate a damper, open a valve or control any other device that re- quires a maintained contact for operation. In addition, all of the drive and bypass’ digital inputs shall be capable of being monitored by the DDC system. This allows for remote monitoring of which (of up to 4) safeties are open.
7.   The VFD shall include an independent PID loop for customer use. The independent PID loop may be used for cooling tower bypass value control, chilled water value / hot water valve control, etc. Both the VFD PID control loop and the independent PID control loop shall continue functioning even if the serial communications con- nection is lost. As default, the VFD shall keep the last good set point command and last good DO & AO commands in memory in the event the serial communications connection is lost and continue controlling the process.

J. EMI / RFI filters. All VFD’s shall include EMI/RFI filters. The onboard filters shall allow the VFD assembly to be CE Marked and the VFD shall meet product standard EN 61800-3 for the First Environment restricted level with up to 100 feet of motor cable. No Exceptions. Certified test reports shall be provided with the submittals confirming compliance to EN 61800-3, First Environment.

2.2 BYPASS CONTROLLER (Refer to Schedule – Pumps that include N+1 redundancy will typically be scheduled to exclude the bypass).

A. A complete factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of a door interlocked, pad lockable circuit breaker, output contactor, bypass contactor, and fast acting VFD input fuses are required. UL Listed motor overload protection shall be provided in both drive and bypass modes.

B. The bypass enclosure door and VFD enclosure must be mechanically interlocked such that the disconnecting device must be in the “Off” position before either enclosure may be accessed.

C. The VFD and bypass package shall have a UL listed short circuit current rating (SCCR) of 100,000 amps and this rating shall be indicated on the UL data label.

D. Drive Isolation Fuses - To ensure maximum possible bypass operation, fast acting fuses, exclusive to the VFD, shall be provided to allow the VFD to disconnect from the line prior to

clearing upstream branch circuit protection. This maintains bypass operation capability in the event of a VFD failure. Bypass designs which have no such fuses, or that incorporate fuses common to both the VFD and the bypass, will not be accepted.

E. The system (VFD and Bypass) tolerated voltage window shall allow the system to operate from a line of +30%, -35% nominal voltage range. The system shall incorporate circuitry that will allow the drive or bypass contactor to remain “sealed in” over this voltage tolerance at a minimum.

F. The bypass shall maintain positive contactor control through the voltage tolerance window of nominal voltage +30%, -35%. This feature is designed to avoid contactor coil failure during brown out / low line conditions and allow for input single phase operation when in the VFD mode. Designs that will not allow input single phase operation in the VFD mode are not acceptable.

G. Motor protection from single phase power conditions - the bypass system must be able to detect a single phase input power condition while running in bypass, disengage the motor in a controlled fashion, and give a single phase input power indication. Bypass systems not incorporating single phase protection in bypass mode are not acceptable.

H. The bypass system shall NOT depend on the VFD for bypass operation. The bypass system shall be designed for standalone operation and shall be completely functional in both Hand and Automatic modes even if the VFD has been removed from the system for repair / replacement. Serial communications shall remain functional even with the VFD removed.

I. Serial communications – the bypass shall be capable of being monitored and / or controlled via serial communications. On-board communications protocols shall include ModBus; Johnson Controls N2; Siemens Building Technologies FLN (P1); and BACnet.

J. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; bypass run-stop control; the ability to force the unit to bypass; and the ability to lock and unlock the keypad. The bypass shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as, current (in amps), kilowatt hours (resettable), operating hours (resettable), and bypass logic board temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the bypass relay output status, and all digital input status. All bypass diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote bypass fault reset shall be possible. The following additional status indications and settings shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus and / or via a Form-C relay output – keypad “Hand” or “Auto” selected, bypass selected, and broken belt indication. The DDC system shall also be able to monitor if the motor is running in the VFD mode or bypass mode over serial communications. A minimum of 50 field serial communications points shall be capable of being monitored in the bypass mode.

K. The bypass serial communications shall allow control of the bypass’ digital outputs via the serial interface. This control shall be independent of any bypass function or operating state. The bypass’ digital (relay) outputs may be used to actuate a damper, open a valve or control any other device that requires a maintained contact for operation. In addition, all of the bypass’ digital inputs shall be capable of being monitored by the DDC system.

L. There shall be an adjustable motor current sensing circuit for the bypass and VFD modes to provide proof of flow (broken belt) indication. The condition shall be indicated on the keypad

display, transmitted over the building automation protocol and / or via a Form-C relay output contact closure. The broken belt indication shall be programmable to be a system (drive and bypass) indication. The broken belt condition sensing algorithm shall be programmable to cause only a warning or a fault and / or system shutdown.

M. The digital inputs for the system shall accept 24VAC or 24VDC. The bypass shall incorporate an internally sourced power supply and not require an external control power source. The bypass power board shall supply 250 ma of 24 VDC for use by others to power external devices.

N. There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad command, time-clock control, digital input, or serial communications) the bypass shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal the damper to open (motor does not operate). When the damper is fully open, a normally open dry contact (end-switch) shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to a bypass system input and allows motor operation. Up to four separate safety interlock inputs shall be provided. When any safety is opened, the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop, and the damper shall be commanded to close. This feature will also operate in Fireman’s override / smoke control mode.

O. The bypass control shall monitor the status of the VFD and bypass contactors and indicate when there is a welded contactor contact or open contactor coil. This failed contactor condition shall be indicated on the bypass LCD display, programmed to fire a Form-C relay output, and / or over the serial communications protocol.

P. The bypass control shall include a programmable time delay for bypass start and keypad indication that this time delay is in process. A Form C relay output provides a contact closure to signal the VAV boxes open. This will allow VAV boxes to be driven open before the motor operates at full speed in the bypass mode. The time delay shall be field programmable from 0 – 120 seconds.

Q.   There shall be a keypad adjustment to select manual or automatic transfer bypass. The user shall be able to select via keypad programming which drive faults will result in an automatic transfer to the bypass mode and which faults require a manual transfer to bypass. The user may select whether the system shall automatically transfer from drive to bypass mode on the following drive fault conditions:
a.   Over current
b.   Over voltage
c.   Under voltage
d.   Loss of analog input

R.   The following operators shall be provided:
a.   Bypass Hand-Off-Auto
b.   Drive mode selector
c.   Bypass mode selector
d.   Bypass fault reset

S.   The bypass shall include a two line, 20 character LCD display. The display shall allow the user to access and view:
a.   Energy savings – in US dollars
b.   Bypass motor amps

c.   Bypass input voltage– average and individual phase voltage
d.   Bypass power (kW)
e.   Bypass faults and fault logs
f.   Bypass warnings
g.   Bypass operating time (resettable)
h.   Bypass energy (kilowatt hours – resettable)
i.   I/O status
j.   Parameter settings / programming
k.   Printed circuit board temperature

T.   The following indicating lights (LED type) or keypad display indications shall be provided. A test mode or push to test feature shall be provided.
a.   Power-on (Ready)
b.   Run enable
c.   Drive mode selected
d.   Bypass mode selected
e.   Drive running
f.   Bypass running
g.   Drive fault
h.   Bypass fault
i.   Bypass H-O-A mode
j.   Automatic transfer to bypass selected
k.   Safety open
l.   Damper opening
m.   Damper end-switch made

U. The Bypass controller shall have six programmable digital inputs, and five programmable Form-C relay outputs. This I/O allows for a total System (VFD and Bypass) I/O count of 24 points as standard. The bypass I/O shall be available to the BAS / DDC system even with the VFD removed.

V.   The on-board Form-C relay outputs in the bypass shall programmable for any of the following indications.
a.   System started
b.   System running
c.   Bypass override enabled
d.   Drive fault
e.   Bypass fault
f.   Bypass H-O-A position
g.   Motor proof-of-flow (broken belt)
h.   Overload
i.   Bypass selected
j.   Bypass run
k.   System started (damper opening)
l.   Bypass alarm
m.   Over temperature

W. The bypass shall provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze, fire, smoke contacts, and external start command. All external safety interlocks shall remain fully functional whether the system is in VFD or Bypass mode. The remote start/stop contact shall operate in VFD and

bypass modes. The terminal strip shall allow for independent connection of up to four (4) unique safety inputs.

X. The bypass shall include a supervisory control mode. In this bypass mode, the bypass shall monitor the value of the VFD’s analog input (feedback). This feedback value is used to control the bypass contactor on and off state. The supervisory mode shall allow the user to maintain hysteresis control over applications such as cooling towers and booster pumps even with the VFD out of service.

Y. The user shall be able to select the text to be displayed on the keypad when an external safety opens. Example text display indications include “FireStat”, “FreezStat”, “Over pressure” and “Low suction”. The user shall also be able to determine which of the four (4) safety contacts is open over the serial communications connection.

Z. Smoke Control Override Mode (Override 1) – The bypass shall include a dedicated digital input that will transfer the motor from VFD mode to Bypass mode upon receipt of a dry contact closure from the Fire / Smoke Control System. The Smoke Control Override Mode action is not programmable and will always function as described in the bypass User’s Manual documentation. In this mode, the system will ignore low priority safeties and acknowledge high priority safeties as required by UL 864/UUKL. All keypad control, serial communications control, and normal customer start / stop control inputs will be disregarded. This Smoke Control Mode shall be designed to meet the intent of UL864/UUKL.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine VFC before installation. Reject VFCs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFC installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of VFCs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install VFCs on walls with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels

bolted to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

C. Install fuses in each fusible-switch VFC.

D. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

E. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

F. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1.   Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.
2.   Label each VFC with engraved nameplate.
3.   Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Certified factory start-up shall be provided for each drive by a factory authorized service center. A certified start-up form shall be filled out for each drive with a copy provided to the owner, and a copy kept on file at the manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable pressure switches.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace VFCs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFCs.

END OF SECTION 262923

SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes all interior luminaires complete withsockets, reflectors, diffusers, shades, holders, lamps, drivers, protective devices and all other required appurtenances:

1.   Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
2.   Emergency lighting units.
3.   Exit signs.
4.   Lighting fixture supports.
5.   Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures.

B. Include all wiring connections to branch circuits, controlswitches, and controllers.

C.   Related Sections:
1.   Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.
2.   Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

1.4 REGULATORY AGENCIES

A.   Conform to the applicable requirements of the following agencies’ most current edition of regulations and standards, unless otherwise stated:
1.   American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
2.   Illuminating Engineering Society of North America(IESNA)
3.   Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
4.   Environmental Protection Agency Green Lights Program

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1.   Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
2.   Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.
3.   Ballast, including BF.
4.   Energy-efficiency data.
5.   Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.
6.   Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.
b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each Sample shall include the following:

1.   Lamps and ballasts, installed.
2.   Cords and plugs.
3.   Pendant support system.

D. Installation instructions.

1.   Prior to ordering luminaires, verify exact type of ceilingto be used for each space. Refer to Division 9 and Reflected Ceiling Plans.
2.   Coordinate with Division 15 to avoid conflicts between luminaires and Mechanical and Plumbing piping, ductwork,supports, fittings and equipment.
3.   Furnish to other trades, plaster frames, trim rings, etc.,where required.

E. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1.   Lighting fixtures.
2.   Suspended ceiling components.
3.   Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches of the plane of the luminaires.
4.   Ceiling-mounted projectors.
5.   Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached.
6.   Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a.   Air outlets and inlets.
b.   Speakers.
c.   Sprinklers.
d.   Smoke and fire detectors.
e.   Occupancy sensors.
f.   Access panels.

7. Perimeter moldings.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

G. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.

J.   Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.   LED Luminaire Assembly: Provide a minimum five-year warranty covering maintained integrity and functionality of:
a.   Luminaire Housing, wiring and connections;
b.   LED light source;
c.   LED drivers.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

F. Mockups: Provide interior lighting fixtures for room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections.

1.   Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations.
2.   Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.
3.   Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition assemblies.

B. Work installed by others: Receive, unpack, check, install and lamp luminaires furnished by others and be responsible for them until finally accepted. Maintain a record of all damaged or imperfect luminaires and store same as and where directed.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty which includes any replacement and service at no cost to the owner to be extended as indicated below.

B. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1.   Lamps: 10 for every 100, minimum 5 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
2.   Plastic Diffusers and Lenses:   One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
3.   Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
4.   Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Luminaires, Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.

B.   LED Dimming
1.   OSRAM
2.   Philips Advance
3.   Lutron
4.   Metalux
5.   Halo
6.   Corelite
7.   Wavelinx
8.   Eaton

C. Substitutions
1. Refer to requirements listed in Division 1. Acceptable alternate manufacturers are listed on Lighting Fixture Schedule. If no equal is shown, only the specified fixture(s) is acceptable.

2.2 LAMPS

A. Correlated color temperature (CCT), color rendering index (CRI), wattage, bulb type, and beam spread shall be as specified on Lighting Fixture Schedule. Values for CRI are minimum requirements.

B.   LED Lamps:
1.   Minimum 80 CRI and L70 of 24,000 hours (at 3-hour perstart, if available) for 75 percent of connected lighting load.
2.   LED’s are to be provided by manufacturers with a minimum of (8) years of experience and who provide aminimum (5) year warranty on all electrical parts.

3.   LED components and fixtures shall comply with ANSIchromaticity standards, LM79 and IES LM-80 lumen maintenance testing standards.
4.   Dimmable LED's will utilize constant current reduction or pulse width modulation controls.
5.   White LED luminaires shall provide 4000K color temperature illumination unless otherwise noted onfixture schedule, with no deviation in color temperature through full range of dimming.
6.   Color changing LED luminaires shall provide full spectrum color changing capacity through the use ofred, blue, green and white (amber) LED's.
7.   LED lighting systems with unmatched drivers and powersupplies shall not be acceptable
8.   Mercury -containing lamp: maximum 35 picograms perlumen hour.

2.3 LED

A.   Luminaires:
1.   Luminaires in regularly occupied spaces: luminance ofless than 2,500 cd/m2 between 45 and 90 degrees from nadir.
2.   Luminaires shall be as specified for each type inluminaire schedule.
3.   Luminaire shall have an external label per ANSI C136.15.
4.   Luminaire shall have an internal label per ANSIC136.22.
5.   Nominal luminaire input wattage shall account for nominal applied voltage and any reduction in driverefficiency due to sub-optimal driver loading.
6.   Luminaires shall start and operate in -20°C to +40°Cambient.
7.   Electrically test fully assembled luminaires beforeshipment from factory.
8.   Effective Projected Area (EPA) and weight of the luminaire shall not exceed the values indicated inAppendix A.
9.   Luminaires shall be designed for ease of component replacement and end-of-life disassembly.
10.   Luminaires shall be rated for the ANSI C136.31Vibration Level indicated in Appendix A
11.   LED light source(s) and driver(s) shall be RoHScompliant.
12.   Transmissive optical components shall be applied in accordance with OEM design guidelines to ensure suitability for the thermal/mechanical/chemical environment.

B.   Driver
1.   Rated case temperature shall be suitable for operation in the luminaire operating in the ambient temperaturesindicated.
2.   Shall accept the voltage or voltage range indicated inAppendix A at 50/60 Hz, and shall operate normally forinput voltage fluctuations of plus or minus 10 percent.
3.   Shall have a minimum Power Factor (PF) of 0.90 at fullinput power and across specified voltage range.
4.   Control Signal Interface:
a.   Luminaire types indicated "Required" in Appendix A shall accept a control signal as specified viaseparate controls specification referenced in section 1.2 above, e.g., for dimming.
b.   Luminaire types indicated "Not Required" in Appendix A need not accept a control signal.

C. Electrical immunity (Choose one of the following):

1. Luminaire shall meet the "Basic" requirements in Appendix D. Manufacturer shall indicate on submittal form (Appendix E) whether failure of the electrical immunity system can possibly result in disconnect of power to luminaire.
2. Luminaire shall meet the "Elevated" requirements in Appendix D. Manufacturer shall indicate on submittal form (Appendix E) whether failure of the electrical immunity system can possibly result in disconnect of power to luminaire.

D.   Electromagnetic Interference:
1.   Shall have a maximum Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of20% at full input power and across specified voltage range.
2.   Shall comply with FCC 47 CFR part 15 non-consumerRFI/EMI standards.

E.   Electrical Safety Testing.
1.   Luminaire shall be listed for wet locations by an OSHA NRTL.
2.   Luminaires shall have locality-appropriate governingmark and certification

F. Painted or finished luminaire component exposed to the environment:

1. Shall exceed a rating of six per ASTM D1654 after 1000hrs of testing per ASTM B117.
2. The coating shall exhibit no greater than 30% reduction of gloss per ASTM D523, after 500 hours of QUV testingat ASTM G154 Cycle 6.

G.   Thermal Management
1.   Mechanical design of protruding external surfaces (heatsink fins) for shall facilitate hose- down cleaning anddiscourage debris accumulation.
2.   Liquids or other moving parts shall be clearly indicated in submittals, shall be consistent withproduct testing, and shall be subject to review byOwner.

H.   Minimum Color Rendering Index (CRI): 80 or as noted in schedule. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT).
1.   If nominal CCT specified in Appendix A is listed in Table 1 below, measured CCT and Duv shall be as listed in Table 1.ANSI C136.37 adopted this table from an earlier draft of the Model Specification, thereby confirming the suitability of the indoor criteria from ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377 for use in outdoor applications. Note that if 4000K nominal is specified but 4100K nominal is deemed acceptable, it wouldbe appropriate to specify (in Appendix A) either a range of nominal CCTs or tolerances for the nominal CCT specified.
2.   If nominal CCT specified in Appendix A is not listed inTable 1, measured CCT and Duv shall be as per the criteria for Flexible CCT defined in NEMA C78.377.

Table 1
Allowable CCT and Duv (adapted from NEMA C78.377)
Manufacturer-Rated Nominal CCT (K)   Allowable LM-79 Chromaticity Values
   Measured CCT (K)   Measured Duv
2700   2580 to 2870   -0.006 to 0.006
3000   2870 to 3220   -0.006 to 0.006
3500   3220 to 3710   -0.006 to 0.006
4000   3710 to 4260   -0.005 to 0.007

4500   4260 to 4746   -0.005 to 0.007
5000   4745 to 5311   -0.004 to 0.008
5700   5310 to 6020   -0.004 to 0.008
6500   6020 to 7040   -0.003 to 0.009

I. The following shall be in accordance with correspondingsections of ANSI C136.37.

1.   Wiring and grounding
a.   All internal components shall be assembled and pre-wired using modular electrical connections.
b.   Mounting provisions
c.   Specific configurations are indicated in AppendixA
d.   Terminal blocks for incoming AC lines
e.   Photocontrol receptacle
f.   Latching and hinging
g.   Ingress protection

2.4 LED DIMMING DRIVER

A. The driver shall be provided in accordance withcorresponding sections of ANSI C136.37.

B. Continuous dimming from 100 percent to 0.1 percent relative light output or as indicated in lighting fixture schedule.

C. Ability to operate with installed or specified buildingcontrol system.

D. Lights automatically return to the setting prior to powerinterruption.

E. Upon power interruption on 0-10V source, driver shalloperate at full light output.

F. No visible change in light output with a variation ofplus/minus 10 percent line voltage input.

G. Total Harmonic Distortion less than 20 percent and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum allowable THD requirements.

H. In applications with fixture types, all drivers tracktogether with even illumination.

I.   Driver to track evenly across:
1.   Multiple fixtures.
2.   All light levels.

2.5 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors (Green for new facilities or major renovations, Green or Red as applicable to match existing), visibility, luminance, and lettering size.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:
1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

2.6 HID LAMPS

A. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65 , and color temperature 4000 K.

B. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

C. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.

2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage .

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Do not install reflector cones and visible trim of luminaires until completion of plastering, ceiling tile work, painting, and general cleanup. Installation of reflector cones and visible trim of luminaires shall be carefully coordinated with ceiling openings to prevent light leaks at the ceiling plane. Handle cones and trim carefully to avoid scratching or finger printing. Luminaires shall be completely clean at time of acceptanceby Owner.

B. Securely fasten recessed luminaires supported by suspended ceilings to the ceiling framing members with four approvedearthquake clips per luminaire. Each clip shall have a capacity of 100% of the luminaire weight acting in any horizontal direction. Install clips as recommended by luminaire manufacturer.

C. Surface mounted luminaires that are supported by the suspended ceiling system shall be securely fastened to the ceiling framing members with two approved earthquake clamping device that completely surround the framing members. Provide a No. 9 gauge safety wire securely fastened to each clamping device and the structure above. Each clamping device shall have a capacity of 100% of theluminaire weight acting in any horizontal direction.

D. Suspended luminaires: Provide hangers capable of supporting twice the combined weight of luminaires supported by hangers. Provide with swivel hangers to ensure a plumb installation. Hanger shall be cadmium- plated steel with a swivel-ball tapped for the conduit sizeindicated. Hangars shall be shock-absorbing type where indicated. Hangars shall allow luminaires to swing within an angle of 20 degrees. Brace pendants four feet or longer provided in shops or hangers to limit swinging. Single unit suspended fluorescent luminaires shall have twin-stem hangers. Multiple unit or continuous row fluorescent luminaires shall have a tubing or stem for wiring at one point and a tubing or rod suspension provided for each unit length of chassis, including one at each end. Rods shall be a minimum 0.18 inch diameter.

E. Suspended luminaires shall be securely fastened to the structure above each luminaire with No. 9 gauge wire at a minimum of two locations for every four feet of luminaire length. Provide a minimum of two No. 9 gauge wire for eachluminaire less than four feet.

F. Acoustical tile suspension ceiling systems will be providedwith hanger wires located within six inches of each corner of the luminaire under Section 095123. Where required by local codes, where ceiling systems are not seismically braced or where the weight of luminaires may cause deformation of the suspended ceiling, provide independent seismic restraint supports for luminaires connected to thestructure above. The amount of deformation allowed is specified in Section 0952130.

G. Drywall suspension ceiling systems will be provided with supplemental steel stud channels at luminaire locations for supporting luminaires to the ceiling system under Section 092216. Securely fasten recessed and/or surface mounted luminaires to steel channels with approved earthquake clipsor clamping devices. Where required by local codes, whereceiling systems are not seismically braced or where the weight of the luminaire may cause deformation of the suspended ceiling, provide independent seismic restraint supports for luminaires connected to the structure above. The amount of deformation allowed is specified in Section 092216.

H. Where MC cable is not used or allowed, connect luminaires to outlet boxes with six foot lengths of flexible conduit (Greenfield) and luminaire wire. Where MC or AC cable is used, provide all recessed luminaires with flexible conduit connection to an accessible outlet box located at the side of the ceiling opening. Locate box so that luminaires can be readily moved into adjacent ceiling modules and to provide access to space above ceiling. Support flexible conduit from structure. Do not lay on ceiling tiles or attach to any other support systems.

I. Properly align all surface type luminaires. Bolt togetherso that alignment will be permanent.

J. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

K. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect and Project Manager, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

L. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire.

M. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1.   Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.
2.   Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
3.   Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4- inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
4.   Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

N. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1.   Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
2.   Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3.   Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
4.   Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

O. Air-Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.

P. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 LAMP INSTALLATION

A. Do not install lamps for permanent use until operating voltage is verified and established and until luminaires have been washed/cleaned for acceptance by Owner.

B. Install lamps in accordance with lamp and luminairemanufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 WASTE MATERIALS

A. Protection
1. Work Procedure: Furnish labor, materials, services and equipment necessary for the removal of PCB containing lighting drivers in accordance with local, state, or federal

regulations. Package and mark PCB as required by EPA and DOT regulations and dispose of in accordance with EPA, DOT and local regulations at a certified waste disposal site.
2. Special Hazards: PCBs shall not be exposed to open flames or other high temperature sources since toxicdecomposition byproducts may be produced.
3. PCB Caution Label: 40 CFR 761, Subpart C. Affix labels to PCB waste containers. Provide label with sufficient print size to be clearly legible, with bold print on a contrasting background, displaying the following: "CAUTION: Contains PCBs (Polychlorinated Biphenyls)".

B.   Work Operations: Ensure that work operations or processes involving PCB or PCB- contaminated materials are conducted in accordance with 40 CFR 761 and the applicable requirements of the section, including, but not limited to: Obtaining advance approval of PCB storage sites.
1.   Notifying Project Manager prior to commencing theoperation
2.   Reporting leaks and spills to the Project Manager.
3.   Cleaning up spills.
4.   Inspecting PCB and PCB-contaminated items and waste containers for leaks and forwarding copies of inspection reports to the Project Manager.
5.   Maintaining inspection, inventory and spill records.

C.   PCB Spill Cleanup Requirements:
1.   PCB Spills: Immediately report to the Owner andArchitect any PCB spills on the ground or in thewater, PCB spills in drip pans, or PCB leaks
2.   PCB Spill Control Area: Rope off an area around theedges of a PCB leak or spill and post a "PCB Spill Authorized Personnel Only" caution sign. Immediately transfer leaking items to a drip pan or other container.

D.   PCB Spill Cleanup
1.   40 CFR 761, Subpart G. Initiate clean up of spills assoon as possible, but no later than 48 hours of its discovery. Mop up the liquid with rage or other conventional absorbent. The spent absorbent shall beproperly contained and disposed of as solid PCB waste.
2.   Records and Certifications: Document the cleanup with record of decontamination in accordance with 40 CFR 761, Section 125, Requirements for OCB Spill Cleanup.Provide certification of decontamination.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements in NFPA 101.

C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.6 TESTS

A. Completely test entire installation and leave insatisfactory operating condition.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 1 month of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.

1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.

END OF SECTION 265100